Watlow SERIES D8 User's Guide


Add to my manuals
232 Pages

advertisement

Watlow SERIES D8 User's Guide | Manualzz

Series D8

User’s Guide

Watlow Anafaze

1241 Bundy Blvd.

Winona, MN 55987

Customer Service:

Phone ....... 1-800-414-4299

Fax ........... 1-800-445-8992

Technical Support:

Phone ....... (507) 494-5656

Fax ........... (507) 452-4507

Email ........ [email protected]

Part No. 0600-3120-2000 Rev.

B

November 2008

Copyright © 2005, Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrie val system, or transmitted in an y form without written permission from Watlow Anafaze.

Anafaze is a re gistered trademark of Watlow Electric Manuf acturing Compan y. DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. UL is a registered trademark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

RSNetWorx, RSLinx and RSLogix are trademarks of Rockwell Software Inc.

DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association.

Warranty

Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated w arrants that the products furnished under this Agreement will be free from defects in material and w orkmanship for a period of three years from the date of shipment. The Customer shall provide notice of any defect to Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated within one week after the Customer's disco very of such defect. The sole obligation and liability of Watlow

Anafaze, Incorporated under this w arranty shall be to repair or replace, at its option and without cost to the Customer, the defective product or part.

Upon request by Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated, the product or part claimed to be defecti ve shall immediately be returned at the Customer's e xpense to Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated. Replaced or repaired products or parts will be shipped to the Customer at the e xpense of Watlow Anafaze,

Incorporated.

There shall be no w arranty or liability for an y products or parts that ha ve been subject to misuse, accident, negligence, failure of electric power or modification by the Customer without the writte approval of Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated. Final determination of w arranty eligibility shall be made by Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated. If a w arranty claim is considered in valid for any reason, the Customer will be char ged for services performed and e xpenses incurred by Watlow Anafaze,

Incorporated in handling and shipping the returned unit.

If replacement parts are supplied or repairs made during the original w arranty period, the warranty period for the replacement or repaired part shall terminate with the termination of the w arranty period of the original product or part.

The foregoing warranty constitutes the sole liability of Watlow Anafaze, Incorporated and the Customer's sole remedy with respect to the products. It is in lieu of all other w arranties, liabilities, and remedies. Except as thus pro vided, Watlow Anafaze, Inc., disclaims all w arranties, e xpress or implied, including any warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose

Please Note

: External safety devices must be used with this equipment.

Table of Contents

List of Figures ix

List of Tables xiii

1 System Overview 1

Manual Contents 1

Getting Started 2

Safety Symbols 2

Initial Inspection 2

Product Features 2

D8 Parts List 5

Technical Description 6

D8 6

TB50 8

D8 Cabling 8

Safety 8

External Safety Devices 8

Power-Fail Protection 9

2 Installation 11

Typical Installation 12

Mounting Controller Components 12

Recommended Tools 13

Mounting the Controller 13

Mounting the TB50 16

Mounting the Power Supply 18

Mounting the Dual DAC or Serial DAC Module 19

System Wiring 20

Wiring Recommendations 20

Noise Suppression 21

Ground Loops 22

Power Connections 23

Wiring the Power Supply 23

Connecting the TB50 to the D8 25

Testing the System 26

TB50 or TB18 Test 26

Digital Output Test 26

Digital Input Test 27

Sensor Wiring 27

Input Wiring Recommendations 28

Thermocouple Connections 29

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze i

Table of Contents ii

RTD Input Connections 30

Voltage Input Connections 30

Current Input Connections 30

Wiring Control and Digital I/O 31

Output Wiring Recommendations 31

Cable Tie Wraps 31

Digital Outputs 31

Digital Inputs 35

TB18 Connections 36

TB50 Connections 37

Analog Outputs 38

Wiring the Dual DAC 38

Wiring the Serial DAC 39

Connecting the D8 to a DeviceNet Network 40

Connector Type 40

Pinout 41

Network Length 42

Baud Rate (Data Rate) 42

Node Address (MAC ID) 42

Status Indicators 43

3 Communicating by DeviceNet 45

Accessing Data with a DeviceNet Master 45

Software 45

About The Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) 46

Configuring a D8 Using RSNetWorx 46

Registering the D8 without an EDS File 47

Registering the D8 with the Watlow EDS File 48

Mapping Polled I/O Data 50

Adding the D8 to the Master's Scanlist 50

Assigning PLC Addresses 51

Sample Ladder Logic 53

Accessing Polled I/O Data 53

Setting a Value with an Explicit Message 55

Reading a Value with an Explicit Message 57

Setting Parameters via DeviceNet 58

Non-Numeric Settings 58

Bit-Wise Values 59

Decimal Placement for Numeric Values 59

Decimal Placement for Percentage Values 60

D8 DeviceNet Overview 60

Master/Slave Connections 60

Addressing 61

Data Types 61

DeviceNet Objects 61

Identity Object 61

Message Router Object 62

DeviceNet Object 63

Assembly Object 63

Connection Object 66

Input Object 67

Output Object 68

Control Object 70

Alarm Object 71

Watlow Anafaze

Series D8 User’s Guide

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

PV Retransmit Object 72

Ratio Object 73

Cascade Object 74

Global Object 75

4 Operation and Setup 77

General Navigation Map 77

Keypad 79

Displays 80

Loop Display 80

Alarm Displays 81

Job Display 83

Changing the Set Point 84

How to Manually Change the Set Point 84

Other Methods of Changing the Set Point 84

Changing the Control Mode and Output Power 85

Accessing and Navigating the Setup Menus 86

How to Access the Setup Menus 86

How to Edit a Setup Parameter 86

Setting Up Closed-Loop Control 87

Feedback 87

Control Algorithm 87

Control Output Signal Forms 87

Heat and Cool Outputs 87

How to Set Up Closed-Loop Control 88

Setting Up a Process Input 88

Input Scaling 88

Input Scaling Example: 4 to 20 mA Sensor 89

Input Scaling Example: 0 to 5 Vdc Sensor 90

Autotuning 91

How Does Autotuning Work? 91

Prerequisites 92

How to Autotune a Loop 92

Setting Up Alarms 93

Failed Sensor Alarms 93

Process Alarms 95

Global Alarm 97

Setting Up Process Variable Retransmit 97

How to Set Up Process Variable Retransmit 98

Process Variable Retransmit Example: Data Logging 98

Setting Up Cascade Control 100

How the Secondary Set Point is Determined 100

Proportional-Only Control on the Primary Loop 101

How To Set Up Cascade Control 102

Cascade Control Example: Water Tank 102

Setting Up Ratio Control 104

How to Set Up Ratio Control 105

Ratio Control Example: Diluting KOH 105

Setting Up Differential Control 106

How to Set Up Differential Control 107

Differential Control Example: Thermoforming 107

Setting Up Remote Analog Set Point 107

How to Set Up a Remote Analog Set Point 108

Remote Analog Set Point Example: Changing a Set Point with a PLC 108

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze

Table of Contents iii

Table of Contents

5 Tuning and Control 111

Control Algorithms 111

On/Off Control 112

Proportional Control (P) 112

Proportional and Integral Control (PI) 113

Proportional, Integral and Derivative Control (PID) 114

Heat and Cool Outputs 114

Setting Up and Tuning PID Loops 115

Proportional Band Settings 115

Integral Settings 115

Derivative Settings 116

General PID Constants by Application 117

Proportional Band Only (P) 117

Proportional with Integral (PI) 117

Proportional and Integral with Derivative (PID) 117

Control Outputs 118

Output Control Signals 118

Output Filter 120

Reverse and Direct Action 120

6 Menu and Parameter Reference 121

Operator Parameters 121

Set Point 122

Mode 122

Heat/Cool Output 122

Process Variable 123

Overview of the Setup Menus 123

Global Setup Menu 125

Load Setup From Job 125

Save Setup As Job 125

BCD Job Load 126

BCD Job Load Logic 126

Mode Override 127

Mode Override Digital Input Active 128

Power Up Alarm Delay 128

Power Up Loop Mode 128

Keypad Lock 129

Thermocouple Short Alarm 129

AC Line Frequency 129

Digital Output Alarm Polarity 129

MAC ID 130

Baud Rate 130

Module LED 130

Network LED 130

Bus Off Count 130

Model and Firmware Version 131

Input Menu 131

Input Type 131

Loop Name 132

Input Units 132

Calibration Offset 132

Reversed Thermocouple Detection 133

Display Format 133

Input Range High 134

iv Watlow Anafaze

Series D8 User’s Guide

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Input High Signal 134

Input Range Low 135

Input Low Signal 135

Input Filter 135

Control Menu 136

Heat/Cool Proportional Band 136

Heat/Cool Integral 137

Heat/Cool Derivative 137

Heat/Cool Manual Reset 137

Heat/Cool Filter 137

Hysteresis 138

Restore Automatic Mode 138

Output Menu 139

Heat/Cool Output Type 139

Heat/Cool Cycle Time 140

Heat/Cool SDAC Signal 140

Heat/Cool SDAC Low Signal 140

Heat/Cool SDAC High Signal 140

Heat/Cool Action 141

Heat/Cool Power Limit 141

Heat/Cool Power Limit Time 141

Sensor Fail Heat/Cool Output 142

Open Thermocouple Heat/Cool Output Average 142

Heat/Cool Output Curve 143

Alarms Menu 143

Alarm High Set Point 143

Alarm High Function 144

Alarm High Output 144

High Deviation Value 145

High Deviation Function 145

High Deviation Output 145

Low Deviation Value 145

Low Deviation Function 145

Low Deviation Output 146

Alarm Low Set Point 146

Alarm Low Function 146

Alarm Low Output 146

Alarm Hysteresis 147

Alarm Delay 147

Process Variable Retransmit Menu 148

Heat/Cool Output Retransmit 148

Heat/Cool Retransmit Low Process Variable 148

Heat/Cool Retransmit High Process Variable 148

Cascade Menu 149

Cascade Primary Loop 149

Cascade Low Set Point 149

Cascade High Set Point 149

Ratio Menu 150

Ratio Master Loop 150

Ratio Low Set Point 150

Ratio High Set Point 151

Control Ratio 151

Ratio Set Point Differential 151

I/O Tests Menu 151

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze

Table of Contents v

Table of Contents

Digital Inputs 152

Keypad Test 152

Display Test 152

Test Digital Output 1 to 20 153

Parameters Only Available via Communications 153

Alarm Acknowledge 153

Alarm Enable 153

Alarm Function 154

Alarm Status 154

Ambient Sensor Reading 155

Heat/Cool Output Action for Watchdog Inactivity Fault 156

7 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring 157

When There is a Problem 157

Returning a Unit 158

Troubleshooting the Controller 158

Process Alarms 159

Ambient Warning 160

Failed Sensor Alarms 160

System Alarms 160

Other Behaviors 161

Reading the DeviceNet Indicator Lights 162

Corrective and Diagnostic Procedures 163

Low Power 163

Battery Dead 163

H/W Error: Gain or Offset 164

H/W Error: Ambient 165

Keys Do Not Work 166

Checking Analog Inputs 166

Earth Grounding 167

Testing Control Output Devices 168

Testing the TB18 and TB50 168

Testing Control and Digital Outputs 168

Testing Digital Inputs 169

Clearing the RAM 169

Replacing the Flash Memory Chip 170

Installing Scaling Resistors 172

Input Circuit 172

Current Inputs 173

Voltage Inputs 174

RTD Inputs 175

Scaling and Calibration 176

Configuring Serial DAC Outputs 176

Configuring Dual DAC Outputs 177

8 Specifications 179

System Specifications 179

Physical Specifications 179

Inputs 185

Outputs 187

Power Supply 189

Dual DAC Specifications 191

Dual DAC Inputs 192

Dual DAC Analog Outputs 192

vi Watlow Anafaze

Series D8 User’s Guide

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Serial DAC Specifications 193

Serial DAC Inputs 194

Serial DAC Analog Outputs 195

Glossary 197

Index 205

Menu Structure 213

Table of Contents

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze vii

Table of Contents Series D8 User’s Guide viii Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

List of Figures

1 System Overview

Figure 1.1—D8 Standard Parts List 5

Figure 1.2—D8 Special Inputs Parts List 6

Figure 1.3—D8 Rear Views 6

Figure 1.4—D8 Front Panel 7

Figure 1.5—TB50 8

2 Installation

Figure 2.1—D8 System Components 12

Figure 2.2—Module Dimensions and Clearance 14

Figure 2.3—Wiring Clearances 14

Figure 2.4—Mounting Bracket 15

Figure 2.5—Mounting the TB50 16

Figure 2.6—TB50 Mounted on a DIN Rail (Front) 16

Figure 2.7—TB50 Mounted on DIN Rail (Side) 17

Figure 2.8—Mounting a TB50 with Standoffs 17

Figure 2.9—D8 Power Supply Mounting Bracket 18

Figure 2.10—Dual DAC and Serial DAC Dimensions 19

Figure 2.11—D8 Series Controller with TB50 23

Figure 2.12—Power Connections with the D8 Power Supply 25

Figure 2.13—Thermocouple Connections 29

Figure 2.14—RTD Connections 30

Figure 2.15—Voltage Signal Connections 30

Figure 2.16—Current Signal Connections 30

Figure 2.17—Digital Output Wiring 32

Figure 2.18—Sample Heat, Cool and Alarm Output Connections 33

Figure 2.19—Output Connections Using External Power Supply 34

Figure 2.20—TB50 Watchdog Timer Output 34

Figure 2.21—TB18 Watchdog Timer Output 34

Figure 2.22—Wiring Digital Inputs 35

Figure 2.23—Dual DAC with Current Output 38

Figure 2.24—Dual DAC with Voltage Output 39

Figure 2.25—Single/Multiple Serial DACs 40

Figure 2.26—DeviceNet Connector 40

Figure 2.27—DeviceNet Connector 41

Figure 2.28—Pinout 41

Figure 2.29—D8 Side with Rotary Switches 43

0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze ix

x

List of Figures Series D8 User’s Guide

3 Communicating by DeviceNet

Figure 3.1—RSNetWorx On-line with Found Devices 47

Figure 3.2—The D8 Registered in RSNetWorx 48

Figure 3.3—D8 Properties in RSNetWorx 49

Figure 3.4—Parameters Tab 50

Figure 3.5—Adding the D8 to the Scanlist 51

Figure 3.6—Scanner Input Properties 52

Figure 3.7—Advanced Mapping Dialog Box 53

Figure 3.8—Using Scanned Data in Logic 54

Figure 3.9—Contents of the PLC Memory 55

Figure 3.10—Explicit Write in Ladder 56

Figure 3.11—Explicit Read in Ladder 58

Figure 3.12—D84 Produced Static Input 65

Figure 3.13— D84 Consumed Static Output 65

Figure 3.14—D88 Produced Static Input 65

Figure 3.15—D88 Consumed Static Output 66

4 Operation and Setup

Figure 4.1—General Navigation Map 78

Figure 4.2—Keypad Navigation 79

Figure 4.3—Loop Display 80

Figure 4.4—Loop Display with Alarm Code 81

Figure 4.5—Display for Failed Sensor Alarm 81

Figure 4.6—Input Scaling 89

Figure 4.7—Activation and Deactivation of Process Alarms 96

Figure 4.8—Application Using Process Variable Retransmit 99

Figure 4.9—Secondary Set Point When Primary Loop Has Heat and Cool Outputs

101

Figure 4.10—Secondary Set Point When Primary Loop Has Heat Output Only 101

Figure 4.11—Example Application Using Cascade Control 103

Figure 4.12—Relationship of Secondary Loop Set Point to Primary Loop Process

Variable in Cascade Example 104

Figure 4.13—Relationship Between the Process Variable on the Master Loop and the

Set Point of the Ratio Loop 105

Figure 4.14—Application Using Ratio Control 106

5 Tuning and Control

Figure 5.1—On/Off Control 112

Figure 5.2—Proportional Control 113

Figure 5.3—Proportional and Integral Control 113

Figure 5.4—Proportional, Integral and Derivative Control 114

Figure 5.5—Time Proportioning and Distributed Zero Crossing Waveforms 118

6 Menu and Parameter Reference

Figure 6.1—Operator Parameter Navigation 121

Figure 6.2—Setup Menus and Parameters 124

Figure 6.3—Linear and Nonlinear Outputs 143

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

7 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

Figure 7.1—Removal of Electronics Assembly from Case 170

Figure 7.2—Screw Locations on PC Board 171

Figure 7.3—Location of Flash Memory Chip 171

Figure 7.4—Input Circuit 173

Figure 7.5—Serial DAC Voltage and Current Jumper Positions 176

Figure 7.6—Dual DAC 177

8 Specifications

Figure 8.1—D8 Module Dimensions 180

Figure 8.2—Module Dimensions and Clearance 181

Figure 8.3—TB50 Dimensions 182

Figure 8.4—TB50 Dimensions with Straight SCSI Cable 183

Figure 8.5—TB50 Dimensions with Right-Angle SCSI Cable 184

Figure 8.6—Power Supply Dimensions (Bottom View) 190

Figure 8.7—Dual DAC Dimensions 191

Figure 8.8—Serial DAC Dimensions 193

Glossary

Index

Menu Structure

List of Figures

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze xi

List of Figures Series D8 User’s Guide xii Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

List of Tables

2 Installation

Table 2.1—Cable Recommendations 21

Table 2.2—Power Connections 24

Table 2.3—TB1 Connections 28

Table 2.4—Digital Output States and Values Stored in the Controller 32

Table 2.5—Digital Input States and Values Stored in the Controller 35

Table 2.6—TB18 Connections 36

Table 2.7—TB50 Connections 37

Table 2.8—DeviceNet Connector 41

Table 2.9—Maximum Network Speed 42

Table 2.10—Module Status Indicator Light 44

Table 2.11—Network Status Indicator Light 44

3 Communicating by DeviceNet

Table 3.1—Number of Bytes 48

Table 3.2—Outbound Transaction Header 57

Table 3.3—Explicit Message Body 57

Table 3.4—Number of Decimal Places for Numeric Values via Logic 59

Table 3.5—Address Components 61

Table 3.6—Elementary Data Types 61

Table 3.7—Identity Class and Services 62

Table 3.8—Identity Instance Attributes 62

Table 3.9—Message Router Class and Services 62

Table 3.10—Message Router Instance Attributes 62

Table 3.11—DeviceNet Class and Services 63

Table 3.12—DeviceNet Class Attributes 63

Table 3.13—DeviceNet Instance Attributes 63

Table 3.14—Assembly Class and Services 64

Table 3.15—Assembly Instance Attributes 64

Table 3.16—Connection Class and Services 66

Table 3.17—Connection Instance Attributes 66

Table 3.18—Input Class and Services 67

Table 3.19—Input Class Attributes (Instance 0) 67

Table 3.20—Input Instance Attributes (Instances 1 to 4 or 8) 68

Table 3.21—Output Class and Services 68

Table 3.22—Output Class Attributes (Instance 0) 69

Table 3.23—Output Instance Attributes (Instances 1 to 4 or 8) 69

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze xiii

List of Tables Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 3.24—Control Class and Services 70

Table 3.25—Control Class Attributes (Instance 0) 70

Table 3.26—Control Instance Attributes (Instances 1 to 4 or 8) 70

Table 3.27—Alarm Class and Services 71

Table 3.28—Alarm Class Attributes (Instance 0) 71

Table 3.29—Alarm Instance Attributes (Instances 1 to 4 or 8) 71

Table 3.30—PV Retransmit Class and Services 72

Table 3.31—PV Retransmit Class Attributes (Instance 0) 72

Table 3.32—PV Retransmit Instance Attributes (Instances 1 to 4 or 8) 73

Table 3.33—Ratio Class and Services 73

Table 3.34—Ratio Class Attributes (Instance 0) 73

Table 3.35—Ratio Instance Attributes (Instances 1 to 4 or 8) 74

Table 3.36—Cascade Class and Services 74

Table 3.37—Cascade Class Attributes (Instance 0) 74

Table 3.38—Cascade Instance Attributes (Instances 1 to 4 or 8) 75

Table 3.39—Global Class and Services 75

Table 3.40—Global Class Attributes (Instance 0) 75

Table 3.41—Global Instance Attributes (Instance 1) 76

4 Operation and Setup

Table 4.1—Control Modes 80

Table 4.2—Alarm Codes and Messages for Process and Failed Sensor Alarms 82

Table 4.3—System Alarm Messages 83

Table 4.4—Input Readings 90

Table 4.5—Scaling Values 90

Table 4.6—Input Readings and Calculations 91

Table 4.7—Scaling Values 91

Table 4.8—Parameters Settings for Process Variable Retransmit Example 99

Table 4.9—Parameter Settings for the Primary Loop in the Cascade Example 103

Table 4.10—Parameter Settings for the Secondary Loop in the Cascade Example

103

Table 4.11—Ratio Control Settings for the Ratio Loop (Loop 2) in the Example 106

Table 4.12—Parameter Settings for the Ratio Loop (Loop 2) for the Example 107

Table 4.13—Parameters Settings for the Master Loop (Loop 1) in the Example 108

Table 4.14—Parameter Settings for the Ratio Loop (Loop 2) in the Example 109

5 Tuning and Control

Table 5.1—Proportional Band Settings 115

Table 5.2—Integral Term and Reset Settings 116

Table 5.3—Derivative Term Versus Rate 116

Table 5.4—General PID Constants 117

6 Menu and Parameter Reference

Table 6.1—Control Modes 122

Table 6.2—D8 Setup Menus 123

Table 6.3—Values for BCD Job Load 126

Table 6.4—Digital Input States Required to Load Each Job 127

xiv Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide List of Tables

Table 6.5—Power Up Loop Modes 128

Table 6.6—Digital Output Alarm Polarity 130

Table 6.7—Input Types and Ranges 131

Table 6.8—Characters for the Loop Name and Input Units Parameters 132

Table 6.9—Calibration Offset Ranges 133

Table 6.10—Display Formats 134

Table 6.11—Proportional Band Values 136

Table 6.12—Values for the Control Hysteresis and Deviation Alarm Parameters 138

Table 6.13—Heat and Cool Output Types 139

Table 6.14—Alarm Functions 144

Table 6.15—Values for Alarm Hysteresis 147

Table 6.16—Bit Positions for Alarm Enable and Alarm Function 154

Table 6.17—Bit Positions for Alarm Status and Alarm Acknowledge 155

Table 6.18—System Status Bits 155

Table 6.19—DeviceNet Value for Watchdog Inactivity Fault 156

7 Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

Table 7.1—Operator Response to Process Alarms 160

Table 7.2—Other Symptoms 161

Table 7.3—Module Status Indicator States and Descriptions 162

Table 7.4—Network Status Indicator Light 163

Table 7.5—Resistor Values for Current Inputs 173

Table 7.6—Resistor Locations for Current Inputs 173

Table 7.7—Resistor Values for Voltage Inputs 174

Table 7.8—Resistor Locations for Voltage Inputs 174

Table 7.9—Resistor Locations for RTD Inputs 175

Table 7.10—Dual DAC Jumper Settings 177

8 Specifications

Table 8.1— Agency Approvals / Compliance 179

Table 8.2—Environmental Specifications 179

Table 8.3—D8 with Straight SCSI 180

Table 8.4—D8 Connections 181

Table 8.5—TB50 Physical Dimensions 181

Table 8.6—TB50 Connections 182

Table 8.7—TB50 with Straight SCSI 182

Table 8.8—TB50 with Right Angle SCSI 183

Table 8.9—Analog Inputs 185

Table 8.10—Thermocouple Range and Resolution 186

Table 8.11—RTD Range and Resolution 186

Table 8.12—Input Resistance for Voltage Inputs 186

Table 8.13—Digital Inputs 187

Table 8.14—Digital Outputs Control / Alarm 188

Table 8.15—5 Vdc Output (Power to Operate Solid-State Relays) 188

Table 8.16—Communications 188

Table 8.17—D8 Power Requirements 188

Table 8.18—Power Supply Environmental Specifications 189

Table 8.19—Power Supply Agency Approvals / Compliance 189

Doc.0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze xv

List of Tables

Table 8.20—Power Supply Physical Specifications 189

Table 8.21—Power Supply with Mounting Bracket 189

Table 8.22—Power Supply Inputs and Outputs 190

Table 8.23—Dual DAC Environmental Specifications 191

Table 8.24—Dual DAC Physical Specifications 191

Table 8.25—Dual DAC Power Requirements 192

Table 8.26—Dual DAC Specifications by Output Range 192

Table 8.27—Serial DAC Environmental Specifications 193

Table 8.28—Serial DAC Physical Specifications 193

Table 8.29—Serial DAC Agency Approvals / Compliance 194

Table 8.30—Serial DAC Inputs 194

Table 8.31—Serial DAC Power Requirements 194

Table 8.32—Serial DAC Analog Output Specifications 195

Series D8 User’s Guide xvi Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

1

System Overview

Manual Contents

This manual describes how to install, set up, and operate a D8 series controller. Each chapter covers a different aspect of your control system and may apply to different users:

Chapter 1: System Overview

provides a component list and summary of features for the D8 series controllers.

Chapter 2: Installation

provides detailed instructions on installing the D8 series controller and its peripherals.

Chapter 3: Communicating via DeviceNet

explains how to add the D8 controller to a network and how to access controller data via DeviceNet.

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup provides instructions about operating and setting up the D8.

Chapter 5: Tuning and Control

describes available control algorithms and provides suggestions for applications.

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

provides detailed descriptions of all menus and parameters for controller setup.

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

includes troubleshooting, upgrading and reconfiguring procedures for technical personnel.

Chapter 8: Specifications

lists detailed specifications of the controller and optional components.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 1

Chapter 1: System Overview

Getting Started

Safety Symbols

Series D8 User’s Guide

These symbols are used throughout this manual:

WARNING!

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

2

Initial Inspection

CAUTION!

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury or property damage.

NOTE!

Indicates pertinent information or an item that may be useful to document or label for later reference.

Accessories may or may not be shipped in the same container as the D8, depending upon their size. Check the shipping invoice against the contents received in all boxes. If you are uncertain whether you have received all of the items you ordered, contact your vendor or Watlow Anafaze.

Product Features

D8 series controllers offer high-performance closed-loop control.

The D8 provides four or eight independent control loops with analog inputs — thermocouples, RTDs and process — and features DeviceNet communications.

When used as a stand-alone controller, you may operate the

D8 via the two-line 16-character display and touch keypad.

You can also use it as the key element in a computer-supervised data acquisition and control system. The D8 can be locally or remotely controlled via its DeviceNet communications interface.

D8 features include:

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Chapter 1: System Overview

Direct Connection of Mixed Thermocouple Sensors:

Connect most thermocouples to the controller with no hardware modifications. Thermocouple inputs feature reference junction compensation, linearization, offset calibration to correct for sensor inaccuracies, detection of open, shorted or reversed thermocouples, and a choice of

Fahrenheit or Celsius display.

Accepts Resistive Temperature Detectors (RTDs):

Use three-wire, 100 Ω , platinum, 0.00385-curve sensors.

Special inputs must be installed.

Automatic Scaling for Process Analog Inputs:

The D8 series automatically scales process inputs used with industrial process sensors. Enter two points, and all input values are automatically scaled. Special inputs must be installed.

Dual Outputs:

The D8 series includes both heat and cool control outputs for each loop. Independent control parameters are provided for each output.

Independently Selectable Control and Output

Modes:

Set each control output to on/off, time proportioning, Serial DAC (digital-to-analog converter) or distributed zero crossing mode. Set up to two outputs per loop for on/off, P, PI or PID control with reverse or direct action.

Boost Output Function:

Set digital outputs to function as boost on/off control in association with any alarm.

Flexible Alarms:

Independently set high and low alarms and high and low deviation alarms for each loop. Alarms can activate a digital output by themselves, or they can be grouped with other alarms to activate an output.

Global Alarm Output:

Any alarm event activates the global alarm output.

CPU Watchdog:

The CPU watchdog timer output notifies you of system failure.

Keypad or DeviceNet Operation:

Set up and run the controller from the keypad or via the DeviceNet interface.

DeviceNet Communications:

Connect software, programmable logic controllers and other master devices using the widely supported DeviceNet protocol. The D8 is compliant with both the ODVA DeviceNet specification and the Interface Guidelines for DeviceNet on Semiconductor Manufacturing Tools.

Multiple Job Storage:

Store up to eight jobs in the controller’s battery-backed memory. Load a job through the keypad, digital inputs or software. Each job is a set of operating conditions, including set points and alarm limits.

Watlow Anafaze 3

Chapter 1: System Overview Series D8 User’s Guide

Nonlinear Output Curves:

Select either of two nonlinear output curves for each control output.

Autotuning:

Use the autotune feature to set up your system quickly and easily. The internal expert system table finds the correct PID parameters for your process.

Low Power Shutdown:

The controller shuts down and turns off all outputs when it detects the input voltage drop below the minimum safe operating level.

Process Variable Retransmit:

Scale a temperature or process and convert it to an analog output for external devices such as chart recorders.

Two-Zone Cascade Control:

Control thermal systems with long lag times, which cannot be accurately controlled with a single loop.

Ratio or Offset Control:

Control one process as a ratio or offset of another process.

Remote Analog Set Point:

Scale an external voltage or current source to provide a set point for a loop.

4 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

D8 Parts List

Chapter 1: System Overview

Number of Loops

4 = 4-loop controller

8 = 8-loop controller

Digital I/O Termination

0 = TB18

1 = SCSI connector, no terminal board or cable

2 = SCSI connector, TB50 and 3-foot cable

3 = SCSI connector, TB50 and 6-foot cable

4 = SCSI connector, TB50 and 3-foot right angle cable

5 = SCSI connector, TB50 and 6-foot right angle cable

Power Supply

0 = No power supply

1 = CE Power Supply

2 = Wall mount power supply

Special Inputs

0 = Thermocouples and -10 to 60mV inputs only

X = Number of current, voltage and RTD inputs

You may have received one or more of the following compo-

nents. See Figure 2.1 on page 12 for D8 configuration infor-

mation.

• D8 series controller with mounting collar and brackets

• TB50 with 50-pin SCSI cable

• Power supply with mounting bracket and screws

• Serial DAC (digital-to-analog converter)

• Special input resistors (installed in D8)

• User’s guide

D8x0-0000-xx0x

Figure 1.1

D8 Standard Parts List

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 5

6

Chapter 1: System Overview Series D8 User’s Guide

D8SI _ _ - _ _ - _ _

Special/Process Input Type

(Not required for thermocouple sensor inputs)

23 = RTD

43 = 0 to 10 mA dc

44 = 0 to 20 mA dc or 4 to 20 mA dc

50 = 0 to 100 mV dc

52 = 0 to 500 mV dc

53 = 0 to 1 Vdc

55 = 0 to 5 Vdc

56 = 0 to 10 Vdc

57 = 0 to 12 Vdc

Start Loop

XX = Loop number XX

End Loop

XX = Loop number XX

Figure 1.2

D8 Special Inputs Parts List

Technical Description

This section contains a technical description of each component of the D8 series controller.

D8

The D8 is housed in a 1/8-DIN panel mount package. It contains the central processing unit (CPU), random access memory (RAM) with a built-in battery, flash memory, communications, digital I/O, analog inputs, display and touch keypad.

DeviceNet

Connector

Network LED

Indicator Light

Module LED

Indicator Light

Series D8 with SCSI Connector.

Series D8 with TB18 Connector.

Figure 1.3

D8 Rear Views

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Front Panel Description

Chapter 1: System Overview

The D8 has the following features:

• Keypad and two-line, 16-character display.

• Screw terminals for the power and analog inputs.

• Micro-style connector for DeviceNet.

• Input power of 12 to 24 Vdc at 1 Amp.

• 50-pin SCSI cable to connect the digital inputs and outputs to the 50-terminal block (TB50). The D8 is available with an 18-terminal block (TB18) in place of the SCSI

connector, as shown in Figure 1.3 on page 6.

• Nonvolatile flash memory for storage of firmware and programmable logic.

• Battery-backed storage of operating parameters. If a power loss occurs, the operating parameters are stored in memory. The battery has a ten-year shelf life, and it is not used when the controller is on.

• Microprocessor control of all calculations for input signal linearization, PID control, alarms, and communications.

The display and keypad provide an intelligent way to operate the controller. The display has 16 alphanumeric or graphic characters per line. The eight-key keypad allows you to change the operating parameters, controller functions and displays.

The displays show process variables, set points and output levels for each loop. A single-loop display, scanning display and alarm display offer a real-time view of process conditions.

For useful tips, help and menu information, press i screen.

from any

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Figure 1.4

D8 Front Panel

Watlow Anafaze 7

Chapter 1: System Overview

TB50

Series D8 User’s Guide

The TB50 is a screw-terminal interface for control wiring. It allows you to connect power controllers and other discrete I/O devices to the D8. The screw terminal blocks accept wires as large as 18 AWG (0.75 mm the TB50 to the D8.

2 ). A 50-pin SCSI cable connects

Figure 1.5

TB50

D8 Cabling

Watlow Anafaze provides cables required to install the D8. A

50-pin SCSI cable connects the TB50 to the D8.

Safety

Watlow Anafaze has made every effort to ensure the reliability and safety of this product. In addition, we have provided recommendations that will allow you to safely install and maintain this controller.

External Safety Devices

8

The D8 controller may fail full-on (100 percent output power) or full-off (0 percent output power), or may remain full-on if an undetected sensor failure occurs.

Design your system to be safe even if the controller sends a 0 percent or 100 percent output power signal at any time Install independent, external safety devices such as the Watlow

Anafaze TLM-8 that will shut down the system if a failure occurs.

Typically, a shutdown device consists of an agency-approved high/low process limit controller that operates a shutdown de-

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 1: System Overview vice such as an mechanical contactor. The limit controller monitors for a hazardous condition such as an under-temperature or over-temperature fault. If a hazardous condition is detected, the limit controller sends a signal to open the contactor.

The safety shutdown device (limit controller and contactor) must be independent from the process control equipment.

WARNING!

The controller may fail in a 0 percent or 100 percent output power state. To prevent death, personal injury, equipment damage or property damage, install external safety shutdown devices that operate independently from the process control equipment.

With proper approval and installation, thermal fuses may be used in some processes.

Power-Fail Protection

In the occurrence of a sudden loss of power, the D8 controller can be programmed to reset the control outputs to off (this is the default). The controller can also be configured to restart to data stored in memory.

A memory-based restart might create an unsafe process condition for some installations. Use a memory-based restart only

if you are certain your system will safely restart. See Power

Up Loop Mode on page 128.

When using the controller with a computer or other master device, you can program the software to automatically reload desired operating constants or process values on powerup.

These convenience features do not eliminate the need for independent safety devices.

Contact Watlow Anafaze immediately if you have any questions about system safety or system operation.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 9

Chapter 1: System Overview Series D8 User’s Guide

10 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

2

Installation

This chapter describes how to install the D8 series controller and its peripherals. Installation of the controller involves the following procedures:

• Determining the best location for the controller

• Mounting the controller and TB50

• Power connection

• Input wiring

• Communications wiring

• Output wiring

WARNING!

Risk of electric shock. Shut off power to your entire process before you begin installing the controller.

WARNING!

The controller may fail in a 0 percent or 100 percent power output state. To prevent death, personal injury, equipment damage or property damage, install external safety shutdown devices that operate independently from the process control equipment.

Watlow Anafaze 11

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Typical Installation

Figure 2.1 shows typical installations of the controller with

the TB50 and the TB18 terminal blocks. The type of terminal block you use greatly impacts the layout and wiring of your

installation site. See Figure 2.2 to Figure 2.10 to determine po-

tential space requirements.

We recommend that you read this entire chapter before beginning the installation procedure. This will help you to carefully plan and assess the installation.

D8 with TB50

SCSI Cable

8 Digital Inputs

20 Digital Outputs

(Control Alarm,

Watchdog)

Signal Inputs

D8

Power Supply

D8 with TB18

Signal Inputs

3 Digital Inputs

D8

Power Supply

11 Digital Outputs (Control, Alarm, Watchdog)

Figure 2.1

D8 System Components

Mounting Controller Components

Install the controller in a location free from excessive heat

(>50º C), dust and unauthorized handling. Electromagnetic and radio frequency interference can induce noise on sensor wiring. Choose locations for the D8 and TB50 such that wiring can be routed clear of sources of interference such as high voltage wires, power switching devices and motors.

NOTE!

For indoor use only.

12 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

WARNING!

To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, install the D8 in a controlled environment, relatively free of contaminants.

Recommended Tools

Use any of the following tools to cut a hole of the appropriate size in the panel.

• Jigsaw and metal file, for stainless steel and heavyweight panel doors.

• Greenlee 1/8-DIN rectangular punch (Greenlee part number 600-68), for most panel materials and thicknesses.

• Nibbler and metal file, for aluminum and lightweight panel doors.

You will also need these tools:

• Phillips head screwdriver

• 1/8-inch (3 mm) flathead screwdriver for wiring

• Multimeter

Mounting the Controller

Mount the controller before you mount the other components, such as the power supply or TB50, or do any wiring. The controller’s placement affects placement and wiring considerations for the other components of your system.

Ensure that there is enough clearance for mounting brackets, terminal blocks, and cable and wire connections. The controller extends 191 mm (7.5 inches) behind the panel face and the collar and brackets extend 7 mm (9/32 inches) on the sides and

12 mm (15/32 inches) above and below it. Allow an additional

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 13

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

41 mm (1.6 inches) for a right-angle DeviceNet connector and

SCSI connector. Refer to Figure 2.2.

188 mm (7.4 in)

41 mm to 54 mm

(1.6 in to 2.1 in) for cables and clearance

25 mm

(1.0 in)

Figure 2.2

Module Dimensions and Clearance

Maximum Panel Thickness

0.2 inch (5 mm)

14

1.80 ± 0.020 inch

(45.7 ± 0.5 mm)

3.63 ± 0.020 inches

(92.2 ± 0.5 mm)

Figure 2.3

Wiring Clearances

We recommend you mount the controller in a panel not more than 0.2 inch (5 mm) thick.

1. Choose a panel location free from excessive heat (more than 50°C), dust, and unauthorized handling. (Make sure there is adequate clearance for the mounting hardware,

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Chapter 2: Installation terminal blocks, and cables. The controller extends 188 mm (7.4 in.) behind the panel. Allow for an additional 41 to 54 mm (1.6 to 2.1 in.) beyond the connectors.

2. Temporarily cover any slots in the metal housing so that dirt, metal filings, and pieces of wire do not enter the housing and lodge in the electronics.

3. Cut a hole in the panel 46 mm (1.80 in.) by 92 mm (3.63

in.) as shown below. (This picture is NOT a template; it is for illustration only.) Use caution; the dimensions given here have 1 mm (0.02 in.) tolerances.

4. Remove the brackets and collar from the controller, if they are already in place.

5. Slide the controller into the panel cutout.

6. Slide the mounting collar over the back of the controller, making sure the mounting screw indentations face toward the back of the controller.

Bracket (top and bottom)

Panel

19

17

21

25

23

13

11

15

7

5

9

3

1

24

22

26

18

16

20

12

10

14

6

4

2

8

+

Bezel Mounting Collar

Figure 2.4

Mounting Bracket

7. Loosen the mounting bracket screws enough to allow for the mounting collar and panel thickness. Place each mounting bracket into the mounting slots (head of the screw facing the back of the controller). Push each bracket backward then to the side to secure it to the controller case.

8. Make sure the case is seated properly. Tighten the installation screws firmly against the mounting collar to secure the unit. Ensure that the end of the mounting screws fit into the indentations on the mounting collar.

Watlow Anafaze 15

Chapter 2: Installation

Mounting the TB50

DIN Rail Mounting

Series D8 User’s Guide

There are two ways to mount the TB50: Use the pre-installed

DIN rail mounting brackets or use the plastic standoffs.

TB50

Mounted with Standoffs

TB50

Mounted to

DIN Rail

Figure 2.5

Mounting the TB50

Snap the TB50 on to the DIN rail by placing the hook side on

the rail first, then pushing the snap latch side in place. See Figure 2.6.

16

Figure 2.6

TB50 Mounted on a DIN Rail (Front)

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

To remove the TB50 from the rail, use a flathead screw driver

to unsnap the bracket from the rail. See Figure 2.7.

Removal

Screwdriver

DIN Rail

Snap Latch

Hook Side

Figure 2.7

TB50 Mounted on DIN Rail (Side)

Mounting with Standoffs

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

1. Remove the DIN rail mounting brackets from the TB50.

2. Choose a location with enough clearance to remove the

TB50, its SCSI cable and the controller itself.

3. Mark the four mounting holes.

4. Drill and tap four mounting holes for #6 (3.5 mm) screws or bolts.

5. Mount the TB50 with four screws or bolts.

There are four smaller holes on the terminal board. Use these holes to secure wiring to the terminal block with tie wraps.

0.2 in

(5 mm)

2.6 in

(66 mm)

4 Holes for

#6 (3.5 mm)

Bolts or Screws

3.4 in

(86 mm)

SCSI Connector

0.2 in

(5 mm)

0.2 in

(5 mm)

Figure 2.8

Mounting a TB50 with Standoffs

Watlow Anafaze 17

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Mounting the Power Supply

If you use your own power supply for the D8, refer to the power supply manufacturer’s instructions for mounting information. Choose a Class 2 power supply that supplies an isolated, regulated 12 to 24 Vdc at 1 A.

Mounting Environment

Leave enough clearance around the power supply so that it can be removed.

18 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

Mounting the Dual DAC or Serial DAC Module

This section describes how to mount the optional Dual DAC and Serial DAC digital-to-analog converters.

Mounting of the Dual DAC and Serial DAC is essentially the same, except that the dimensions differ.

Jumpers

The output signal range of the Dual DAC and Serial DAC

modules is configured with jumpers. See Configuring Dual

DAC Outputs on page 177 and Configuring Serial DAC Out-

puts on page 176 for information about setting these jumpers.

Mounting

Dual DAC

4 Holes for #8 (3.5 mm)

Screws or Bolts

1. Choose a location. The unit is designed for wall mounting. Install it as close to the controller as possible.

2. Mark and drill four holes for screw mounting. Holes ac-

commodate #8 (3.5 mm) screws. See Figure 2.10 for

screw locations. Install the unit with the four screws.

0.3 in

(8 mm) 4 Holes for #8 (3.5 mm)

Screws or Bolts

Serial DAC

0.3 in

(8 mm)

3.62 in

(91 mm)

Electrical

Connectors

3.7 in

(94 mm)

Electrical

Connectors

4.40 in

(112 mm)

3.00 in

(76 mm)

3.62 in

(91 mm)

Electrical

Connectors

3.00 in

(76 mm)

0.37 in

(9 mm)

4.7 in

(119 mm)

0.65 in

(17 mm)

1.75 in

(44 mm)

Electrical

Connectors

5.40 in

(137 mm)

Figure 2.10 Dual DAC and Serial DAC

Dimensions

0.37 in

(9 mm)

0.65 in

(17 mm)

1.75 in

(44 mm)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 19

Chapter 2: Installation

System Wiring

Series D8 User’s Guide

Successful installation and operation of the control system can depend on placement of the components and on selection of the proper cables, sensors and peripheral components.

Routing and shielding of sensor wires and proper grounding of components can insure a robust control system. This section includes wiring recommendations, instructions for proper grounding and noise suppression, and considerations for avoiding ground loops.

WARNING!

To reduce the risk of electrical shock, fire, and equipment damage, follow all local and national electrical codes. Correct wire sizes, fuses and thermal breakers are essential for safe operation of this equipment.

CAUTION!

Do not wire bundles of low-voltage signal and control circuits next to bundles of highvoltage ac wiring. High voltage may be inductively coupled onto the low-voltage circuits, which may damage the controller or induce noise and cause poor control.

Physically separate high-voltage circuits from low-voltage circuits and from D8 hardware. If possible, install high-voltage ac power circuits in a separate panel.

Wiring Recommendations

Follow these guidelines for selecting wires and cables:

• Use stranded wire. (Solid wire can be used for fixed service; it makes intermittent connections when you move it for maintenance.)

• Use 20 AWG (0.5 mm

2

) thermocouple extension wire.

Larger or smaller sizes may be difficult to install, may break easily or may cause intermittent connections.

• Use shielded wire. The electrical shield protects the signals and the D8 from electrical noise. Connect one end of the input and output wiring shield to earth ground.

• Use copper wire for all connections other than thermocouple sensor inputs.

20 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

Function

Analog Inputs

RTD Inputs

Table 2.1

Cable Recommendations

Thermocouple Inputs

Control Outputs and

Digital I/O

Analog Outputs

Mfr. P/N

Belden 9154

Belden 8451

Belden 8772

Belden 9770 thermocouple

Ext. Wire

Belden 9539

Belden 9542

Ribbon Cable

Belden 9154

Belden 8451

2

9

20

50

2

2

No. of

Wires

3

3

2

2

AWG

20

22

20

22

20

24

24

22 to 14

20

22

mm

2

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.5 to 2.5

0.5

0.5

Noise Suppression

The D8 outputs are typically used to drive solid state relays.

These relays may in turn operate more inductive types of loads such as electromechanical relays, alarm horns and motor starters. Such devices may generate electromagnetic interference (EMI, or noise). If the controller is placed close to sources of EMI, it may not function correctly. Below are some tips on how to recognize and avoid problems with EMI.

For earth ground wire, use a large gauge and keep the length as short as possible. Additional shielding may be achieved by connecting a chassis ground strap from the panel to D8 case.

Symptoms of Noise

If your controller displays the following symptoms, suspect noise:

• The display screen blanks out and then reenergizes as if power had been turned off for a moment.

• The process variable value is incorrect on the controller display.

Noise may also damage the digital output circuit such that the digital outputs will not turn on. If the digital output circuit is damaged, return the controller to Watlow Anafaze for repair.

Avoiding Noise

To avoid or eliminate most RFI/EMI noise problems:

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 21

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

• Connect the D8 case to earth ground. The D8 system includes noise suppression circuitry. This circuitry requires proper grounding.

• Separate the 120 Vac and higher power leads from the low-level input and output leads connected to the D8 series controller. Do not run the digital I/O or control output leads in bundles with ac wires.

• Where possible, use solid state relays (SSRs) instead of electromechanical relays. If you must use electromechanical relays, avoid mounting them in the same panel as the D8 series equipment.

• If you must use electromechanical relays and you must place them in a panel with D8 series equipment, use a

0.01 microfarad capacitor rated at 1000 Vac (or higher) in series with a 47 Ω , 0.5 watt resistor across the normally-open contacts of the relay load. This is known as a snubber network and can reduce the amount of electrical noise.

• You can use other voltage suppression devices, but they are not usually required. For instance, you can place a metal oxide varistor (MOV) rated at 130 Vac for 120 Vac control circuits across the load, which limits the peak ac voltage to about 180 Vac (Watlow Anafaze part number

26-130210-00). You can also place a transorb (back-toback zener diodes) across the digital output, which limits the digital output voltage.

Additional Recommendations for a Noise Immune System

We strongly recommended the following:

• Isolate outputs through solid state relays, where possible.

• Isolate RTDs or “bridge” type inputs from ground.

• Isolate digital inputs from ground through solid state relays. If this is not possible, then make sure the digital input is the only connection to earth ground other than the chassis ground.

Ground Loops

Ground loops occur when current passes from the process through the controller to ground. This can cause instrument errors or malfunctions.

A ground loop may follow one of these paths, among others:

• From one sensor to another.

• From a sensor to the dc power supply.

22 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

The best way to avoid ground loops is to minimize unnecessary connections to ground. Do not connect any of the following terminals to earth ground:

• Power supply dc common

• TB1 terminals 9, 10, 19 (analog common)

• TB2 terminal 2 (dc power common)

Do not connect the analog common terminals to the other terminals listed above.

Power Connections

This section explains how to make power connections to the

D8 and the TB50.

DEVICENET

CONNECTOR

NETWORK LED

INDICATOR LIGHT

MODULE LED

INDICATOR LIGHT

Figure 2.11 D8 Series Controller with TB50

Wiring the Power Supply

WARNING!

Use a power supply with a Class 2 rating only. UL approval requires a Class 2 power supply.

Connect power to the controller before any other connections,

This allows you to ensure that the controller is working before any time is taken installing inputs and outputs.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 23

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 2.2

Power Connections

Function

DC Power

(Controller)

DC Common

Power Supply

+12 to 24 Vdc

12 to 24 Vdc

Common

Ground

D8 TB2

+

-

Earth Ground

1. Connect the dc common terminal on the power supply to the dc common (-) terminal on D8 TB2.

2. Connect the positive terminal on the power supply to the dc positive (+) terminal on D8 TB2.

3. If using an isolated dc output or another power supply to power the loads, connect the dc common of the supply powering the loads to the dc common of the supply powering the controller.

4. Use the ground connector on TB2 for chassis ground.

This terminal is connected to the D8 chassis and must be connected to earth ground.

5. Connect 120/240 Vac power to the power supply.

NOTE!

Connect the dc common of the power supply used for loads to the dc common of the supply powering the controller. If the supplies are not referenced to one another, the controller’s outputs will not be able to switch the loads.

NOTE!

When making screw terminal connections, tighten to 4.5 to 5.4 in.-lb. (0.5 to 0.6 Nm).

CAUTION!

Without proper grounding, the D8 may not operate properly or may be damaged.

24 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

CAUTION!

To prevent damage from incorrect connections, do not turn on the heater power or other output power before testing the

connections as explained in Testing the System on page 26.

NOTE!

Do not connect the controller’s dc common

(COM) to earth ground . Doing so will defeat the noise protection circuitry, making measurements less stable.

+5V

5V COM

+15V

15V COM

-15V

Ground

AC Line

AC Neutral green add jumper solid-state relay (ssr)

-

+ ssr

+

ssr

-

+ ssr

-

+

V+ common ground

D8

Controller

1 2 3 4

Serial digital-to-analog converter black

L1 white

120/240V Å (ac)

L2

Figure 2.12 Power Connections with the D8

Power Supply

Connecting the TB50 to the D8

1. Connect the SCSI cable to the controller.

2. Connect the SCSI cable to the TB50.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 25

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Testing the System

This section explains how to test the controller after installation and prior to making field wiring connections.

TB50 or TB18 Test

Use this procedure to verify that the TB50 or TB18 is properly connected and supplied with power:

1. Turn on power to the D8. The display should first show

Calculating checksum

, and then show the single-loop display. If you do not see these displays, disconnect power and check wiring and power supply output.

2. Measure the +5 Vdc supply at the TB50 or TB18: a) Connect the voltmeter’s common lead to TB50 terminal 3 or TB18 terminal 2.

b) Connect the voltmeter’s positive lead to TB50 or

TB18 terminal 1. The voltage should be +4.75 to

+5.25 Vdc.

Digital Output Test

Use this procedure to test the controller outputs before loads are connected. If using it at another time for troubleshooting, disconnect loads from outputs before testing.

1. Connect a 500 Ω to 100 k Ω resistor between TB50 or

TB18 terminal 1 and a digital output terminal. See

Table 2.6 on page 36 for TB18 connections or Table 2.7

on page 37 for TB 50 connections.

2. Connect the voltmeter’s positive lead to terminal 1 on the

TB50 or TB18.

3. Connect the voltmeter’s common lead to the digital output terminal.

4. Use the digital output test in the I/O tests menu to turn the

digital output on and off (see Test Digital Output 1 to 20 on page 153). When the output is off, the output voltage

should be less than 1 V. When the output is on, the output voltage should be between 4.75 and 5.25 V.

26

NOTE!

By default, heat outputs are enabled. Only disabled outputs may be turned on using the manual I/O test. To test heat outputs, set the corresponding loop to manual mode 100 per-

cent output. See Changing the Control Mode and Output Power on page 85.

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Digital Input Test

Chapter 2: Installation

Use the following procedure to test digital inputs before connecting to field devices:

1. Disconnect any system wiring from the input to be tested.

2. Go to the Digital inputs test in the I/O tests menu. This test shows whether the digital inputs are off (open) or on

(closed).

3. Attach a wire to the terminal of the digital input you want

to test. See Table 2.6 on page 36 for TB 18 connections

or Table 2.7 on page 37 for TB50 connections.

a) When the wire is connected only to the digital input terminal, the digital input test should show that the input is off (open).

b) When you connect the other end of the wire to the controller common (TB50 terminal 3 or TB18 terminal 2), the digital input test should show that the input is on (closed).

Sensor Wiring

This section describes how to properly connect thermocouples, RTDs, current and voltage inputs to the controller. The controller can accept any mix of available input types. Some input types require that special scaling resistors be installed

(generally done by Watlow Anafaze before the controller is delivered).

All inputs are installed at the “CH” input connectors (TB1) at the back of the controller. The illustrations below show the connector locations for all D8 series controllers.

CAUTION!

Never run input leads in bundles with high power wires or near other sources of EMI.

This could inductively couple voltage onto the input leads and damage the controller, or could induce noise and cause poor measurement and control.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 27

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Terminal Number

15

16

17

18

19

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11

12

13

14

Label

CH 1 IN+

CH 1 IN-

CH 2 IN+

CH 2 IN-

CH 3 IN+

CH 3 IN-

CH 4 IN+

CH 4 IN-

Com

Com

CH 5 IN+

CH 5 IN-

CH 6 IN+

CH 6 IN-

CH 7 IN+

CH 7 IN-

CH 8 IN+

CH 8 IN-

Com

Table 2.3

TB1 Connections

Function

Channel 1 positive input

Channel 1 negative input

Channel 2 positive input

Channel 2 negative input

Channel 3 positive input

Channel 3 negative input

Channel 4 positive input

Channel 4 negative input

Analog Common

Analog Common

Channel 5 positive input 1

Channel 5 negative input 1

Channel 6 positive input 1

Channel 6 negative input 1

Channel 7 positive input 1

Channel 7 negative input 1

Channel 8 positive input 1

Channel 8 negative input 1

Analog Common

NOTE!

1

Terminals 11 to 18 are not used with a 4-channel controller.

Input Wiring Recommendations

Use multicolored stranded shielded cable for analog inputs.

Watlow Anafaze recommends that you use 20 AWG wire (0.5 mm 2 ). If the sensor manufacturer requires it, you can also use

24 or 22 AWG wiring (0.2 mm 2 ). Most inputs use a shielded twisted pair; some require a three-wire input.

The controller accepts the following inputs without any special scaling resistors:

• J, K, T, S, R, B and E thermocouples.

• Process inputs with ranges between -10 and 60 mV.

To avoid thermocouple open alarms on unused inputs, either set the Input type parameter to skip or jumper the input.

28 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

Thermocouple Connections

Connect the positive lead of the thermocouple to the IN+ terminal for one of the loops, and connect the negative lead to the corresponding IN- terminal.

Use 18 or 20 AWG (0.5 or 0.75 mm 2 ) for all thermocouple inputs. Most thermocouple wire is solid, unshielded wire. When using shielded wire, ground one end only.

CH IN+

CH IN-

White

Red

Type J thermocouple

Shield (if present)

Earth Ground at Process End

Figure 2.13 Thermocouple Connections

CAUTION!

Ground loops and common mode noise can damage the controller or disrupt measurements. To minimize ground loops and common mode noise:

• Do not mix grounded and ungrounded thermocouples. If any thermocouple connected to the controller is of grounded construction, all thermocouples should be of grounded construction and each should be connected to ground at the process end.

• Connect the earth ground terminal on TB2 to a good earth ground, but do not connect the analog common to earth ground. The D8 uses a floating analog common for sensor measurements. The noise protection circuits on the sensor inputs function correctly only if the controller is correctly installed. See

Ground Loops on page 22.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 29

Chapter 2: Installation

RTD Input Connections

Series D8 User’s Guide

RTD inputs require accessory resistors. Watlow Anafaze recommends that you use a 100 Ω , three-wire platinum RTD to prevent reading errors due to cable resistance. If you use a two-wire RTD, jumper the negative input to common. If you must use a four-wire RTD, leave the fourth wire unconnected.

CH IN +

CH IN -

Com

Figure 2.14 RTD Connections

100 Ω RTD

Voltage Input Connections

Voltage inputs with ranges greater than -10 to 60 mV require accessory resistors. Special input resistors installed at Watlow

Anafaze divide analog input voltages such that the controller sees a -10 to 60 mV signal on the loop.

CH IN+

CH IN-

Device with

Voltage

Output

Figure 2.15 Voltage Signal Connections

Current Input Connections

Current inputs require accessory resistors. Special input resistors installed at Watlow Anafaze for analog current signals are such that the controller sees a -10 to 60 mV signal across its inputs for the loop.

CH IN+

CH IN-

Device with

Current

Output

Figure 2.16 Current Signal Connections

30 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

Wiring Control and Digital I/O

This section describes how to wire and configure the control outputs for the D8 series controller. The D8 provides dual control outputs for each loop. These outputs can be enabled or disabled, and are connected through a TB50 or TB18.

NOTE!

Control outputs are connected to controller common when the control output is on. If you connect external devices that may have a low side at a voltage other than controller ground, you may create ground loops. To prevent ground loops, use isolated solid state relays and isolate the control device inputs.

Output Wiring Recommendations

When wiring output devices, use multicolored, stranded, shielded cable for analog outputs and digital outputs connected to panel-mounted solid state relays.

• Analog outputs usually use a twisted pair.

• Digital outputs usually have 9 to 20 conductors, depending on wiring technique.

Cable Tie Wraps

After you wire outputs to the TB50, install the cable tie wraps to reduce strain on the connectors. Each row of terminals has a cable tie wrap hole at one end. Thread the cable tie wrap through the cable tie wrap hole. Then, wrap the cable tie wrap around the wires attached to that terminal block.

Digital Outputs

The D8 provides dual control outputs for up to eight loops. By default, heat outputs are enabled and cool outputs are disabled. If the heat or cool output is disabled for a loop, then the output is available for alarms or programmable logic. The

CPU watchdog timer output can be used to monitor the state

of the controller; see CPU Watchdog Timer on page 34.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 31

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 2.4

Digital Output States and Values

Stored in the Controller

State Value

1 Description

Off

On

0

1

Open circuit

Sinking current to controller common

1

Read and write these values through communications.

All digital outputs sink current to controller common when on. The load may powered by the 5 Vdc supplied by the controller at the TB50, or by an external power supply. When using an external power supply, bear in mind:

• The D8 power supply available from Watlow Anafaze includes a 5 Vdc supply. When using it to supply output loads, connect the 5 Vdc common to the 15 Vdc common at the power supply.

• Do not exceed +24 volts.

• If you connect the external load to earth ground, or if you

cannot connect it as shown in Figure 2.17, then use a sol-

id state relay.

The outputs conduct current when they are on. The maximum current sink capability is 60 mA at 24 Vdc. The outputs cannot

“source” current to a load.

Using Internal Power Supply

TB50 or TB18

+5 Vdc

Loads

Digital Output 1

Digital Output 2

Using External Power Supply

External

Power

Supply +

-

Do not connect to earth ground or equipment ground

TB50 or TB18

Control Common

Loads

Digital Output 1

Digital Output 2

Figure 2.17 Digital Output Wiring

32 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

Configuring Outputs

As you choose outputs for control and alarms, bear in mind the following points:

• You can enable or disable the control outputs. By default, heat outputs are enabled and cool outputs are disabled.

• You can program each control output individually for on/ off, time proportioning, distributed zero-crossing or Serial DAC control.

• You can individually program each control output for direct or reverse action.

• Alarm outputs other than the global alarm are non-latch-

ing. See Global Alarm on page 97.

• Alarms can be suppressed during process start up and for

preprogrammed durations. See Power Up Alarm Delay on page 128.

• Alarm outputs can be configured, as a group, to sink to output during an alarm or stop current flow during an

alarm. See Digital Output Alarm Polarity on page 129.

Control and Alarm Output Connections

Typically control and alarm outputs use external opticallyisolated solid state relays (SSRs). SSRs accept a 3 to 32 Vdc input for control, and some can switch up to 100 Amps at 480

Vac. For larger currents, use silicon control rectifier (SCR) power controllers up to 1000 Amps at 120 to 600 Vac. You can also use SCRs and a Serial DAC for phase-angle fired control.

The control and alarm outputs are open collector outputs referenced in the D8’s common. Each output sinks up to 60 mAdc to the controller common when on.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

NOTE!

Control outputs are sink outputs. They sink current when the output is on. Connect them to the negative side of solid state relays.

Figure 2.18 shows sample heat, cool and alarm output connec-

tions.

TB50 or TB18

Heat Output

Cool Output

Alarm Output

+5 Vdc

-

SSR

+ -

SSR

+ -

SSR

+

Figure 2.18 Sample Heat, Cool and Alarm

Output Connections

Watlow Anafaze 33

Chapter 2: Installation

CPU Watchdog Timer

Series D8 User’s Guide

TB50 or TB18

Heat Output

Cool Output

Alarm Output

Common

-

SSR

- PS +

+ -

SSR

+

Figure 2.19 Output Connections Using

External Power Supply

-

SSR

+

The CPU watchdog timer constantly monitors the microprocessor. It is a sink output located on TB50 terminal 6 or TB18 terminal 3. The output can be connected to an external circuit or device to monitor whether the controller is powered and operational. The output is on (low) when the microprocessor is operating; when it stops operating, the output goes off (high).

Figure 2.20 and Figure 2.21 show the recommended circuit

for the watchdog timer output for the TB50 and the TB18.

TB50

+ 5 Vdc

(Terminal 1)

Watchdog Timer

(Terminal 6)

+

-

SSR

Figure 2.20 TB50 Watchdog Timer Output

TB18

Watchdog Timer

(Terminal 3)

+

-

SSR

Figure 2.21 TB18 Watchdog Timer Output

34 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Digital Inputs

Chapter 2: Installation

External Switching Device

All digital inputs are transistor-transistor logic (TTL) level inputs referenced to controller common and the internal +5 V power supply of the D8.

When an input is connected to the controller common, the input is considered on. Otherwise, the input is considered off.

Most features that use the digital inputs can be user-configured to activate when an input is either on or off.

In the off state, internal 4.7 k Ω resistors pull the digital inputs high to 5 Vdc with respect to the controller common.

Table 2.5

Digital Input States and Values

Stored in the Controller

State Value

1 Description

Off

On

0

1

Open circuit

Digital input connected to controller common

1

Read and write these values through communications.

To ensure that the inputs are reliably switched, use a switching device with the appropriate impedances in the on and off states and do not connect the inputs to external power sources.

When open, the switching device must provide an impedance of at least 14 k Ω to ensure that the voltage will rise to greater than 3.7 Vdc. When closed, the switch must provide not more than 1.7 k Ω impedance to ensure the voltage drops below 1.3

Vdc.

To install a switch as a digital input, connect one lead to the common terminal on the TB50 (terminals 3 and 4) or TB18

(terminal 2). Connect the other lead to the desired digital input terminal on the TB50 (terminals 43 to 50) or TB18 (terminals

16 to 18).

TB50

Input

External

Switching

Device

Control Com

Figure 2.22 Wiring Digital Inputs

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 35

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Functions Activated by Digital Inputs

Use digital inputs to activate the following functions:

Load a job that is stored in controller memory. See BCD

Job Load on page 126.

• Change all loops to manual mode at specified output lev-

els. See Mode Override on page 127.

Enable thermocouple short detection. See Thermocouple

Short Alarm on page 129.

• Restore automatic control after a failed sensor has been

repaired. See Restore Automatic Mode on page 138.

TB18 Connections

Terminal

15

16

17

18

9

10

11

12

13

14

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Table 2.6

TB18 Connections

Control Output

1

Function D84 _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ D88 _ - _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _

+5 Vdc

CTRL COM

Watchdog timer

Global alarm

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

Output 9

Output 10

Output 18 2

Input 1

Input 2

Input 3

Loop 1 heat

Loop 2 heat

Loop 3 heat

Loop 4 heat

Loop 1 cool

Loop 2 cool

Loop 3 cool

Loop 4 cool

Serial DAC clock

Loop 1 heat

Loop 2 heat

Loop 3 heat

Loop 4 heat

Loop 5 heat

Loop 6 heat

Loop 7 heat

Loop 8 heat

Loop 1 cool

Loop 2 cool

Serial DAC clock

1

The indicated outputs are dedicated for control when enabled in the loop setup. If one or both of the outputs are disabled for a loop, then the corresponding digital outputs become available for alarms.

2

If you install a Watlow Anafaze Serial DAC, the D8 series controller uses digital output 18 (terminal 15) for a clock line. You cannot use output 18 for anything else if a Serial DAC is installed.

36 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

TB50 Connections

Table 2.7

TB50 Connections

Control Output

1

Control Output

1

33

35

37

39

41

25

27

29

31

17

19

21

23

11

13

15

7

9

43

45

47

49

Terminal

1

3

5

Function

+5 Vdc

CTRL COM

Not used

Not used

Output 1

Output 2

Output 3

Output 4

Output 5

Output 6

Output 7

Output 8

Output 9

Output 10

Output 11

Output 12

Output 13

Output 14

Output 15

Output 16

Output 17

Input 1

Input 3

Input 5

Input 7

D88

Loop 1 heat

Loop 2 heat

Loop 3 heat

Loop 4 heat

Loop 5 heat

Loop 6 heat

Loop 7 heat

Loop 8 heat

Loop 1 cool

Loop 2 cool

Loop 3 cool

Loop 4 cool

Loop 5 cool

Loop 6 cool

Loop 7 cool

Loop 8 cool

D84

Terminal

Function D88 D84

Loop 2 heat

Loop 3 heat

Loop 4 heat

Loop 1 cool

Loop 2 cool

Loop 3 cool

Loop 4 cool

2

4

6

+5 Vdc

CTRL COM

Watchdog

Timer

Global Alarm

Loop 1 heat

8

10

34

36

38

40

42

26

28

30

32

18

20

22

24

12

14

16

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Output 18 2 Serial

DAC clock

44

46

48

50

Input 2

Input 4

Input 6

Input 8

1

The indicated outputs are dedicated for control when enabled in the loop setup. If one or both of a loop’s outputs are disabled, the corresponding digital outputs become available for alarms or programmable logic.

2

If you install a Watlow Anafaze Serial DAC, the D8 uses digital output

18 (terminal 42) for a clock line. You cannot use output 18 for anything else if a Serial DAC is installed.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 37

Chapter 2: Installation

Analog Outputs

Series D8 User’s Guide

Wiring the Dual DAC

Analog outputs can be provided by using a Dual DAC or Serial DAC module to convert the open collector outputs from the controller. Use multicolored stranded shielded cable for analog outputs. Analog outputs generally use a twisted pair wiring. The following sections describe how to connect the

Dual DAC and Serial DAC modules to power the controller outputs and the load.

A Dual DAC module includes two identical circuits. Each can convert a distributed zero cross (DZC) signal from the controller to a voltage or current signal. Watlow Anafaze strong- ly

recommends using a power supply separate from the controller supply to power the Dual DAC. Using a separate power supply isolates the controller’s digital logic circuits and analog measurement circuits from the frequently noisy devices that take the analog signal from the Dual DAC.

Several Dual DAC modules may be powered by one power supply. Consult the Specifications chapter for the Dual

DAC’s power requirements. Also note in the specifications that the Dual DAC does not carry the same industry approvals as the Serial DAC.

TB50 or TB18

+5V 1

Control Output mA Load

-

+

2

3

5

6

Dual DAC

1 +5V CTRL Supply

4

DZC CTRL PID Output

+12/24 Vdc External

Power Supply

+Vdc Load Connection

-mAdc Load Connection

-External Power

Supply/ Vdc Load

Connection

+ -

12 to 24 Vdc Power Supply

Figure 2.23 Dual DAC with Current Output

38 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

TB50 or TB18

+5V 1

PID Loop Output

Vdc Load

+

-

Dual DAC

1 +5V CTRL Supply

2

3

4

5

6

DZC CTRL PID Output

+12/24 Vdc External

Power Supply

+Vdc Load Connection

-mAdc Load Connection

-External Power

Supply/ Vdc Load

Connection

+ -

12 to 24 Vdc Power Supply

Figure 2.24 Dual DAC with Voltage Output

Wiring the Serial DAC

The Serial DAC provides a robust analog output signal. The module converts the proprietary Serial DAC signal from the controller’s open collector output in conjunction with the

clock signal to an analog current or voltage. See Figure 2.25

for wiring. The Serial DAC is user-configurable for voltage or

current output through firmware configuration. See Configuring Serial DAC Outputs on page 176.

The Serial DAC optically isolates the controller’s control output from the load. When a single Serial DAC is used, it may be powered by the 5 Vdc found on the TB50 or by an external power supply referenced to the controller’s power supply.

When using multiple Serial DACs, the controller cannot provide sufficient current; use the 5 Vdc output from the D8 power supply.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 39

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Controller

Power Supply

+5 V

5 V Common

15 V Common

Daisy chain up to

16 Serial DACs

Serial DAC

1 +5V In

2

3

COM In

CLK In

TB50 or TB18

Serial DAC Clock

Control Output

4

5

6

Data In

+ Out

- Out

Load

+

-

Figure 2.25 Single/Multiple Serial DACs

Connecting the D8 to a DeviceNet Network

Connector Type

Connect the D8 to the DeviceNet network using a female, sealed, micro-style, quick disconnect connector with five conductors. The DeviceNet connector is in the back of the controller.

J4

DeviceNet

Connector

Network LED

Indicator Light

Module LED

Indicator Light

40

Figure 2.26 DeviceNet Connector

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation

J4

DeviceNet

Connector

Network LED

Indicator Light

Module LED

Indicator Light

Pinout

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Figure 2.27 DeviceNet Connector

2

3

5

4

Figure 2.28 Pinout

Pin

3

4

1

2 V+

5

Table 2.8

DeviceNet Connector

Signal

Shield

V-

CAN+

CAN-

Function

Shield interconnect

DeviceNet power

DeviceNet power return

Positive side of the DeviceNet bus

Negative side of DeviceNet bus

1

Watlow Anafaze 41

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Network Length

The network speed is limited by the end-to-end network distance. The longer the network, the slower the baud rate setting

must be. See Table 2.9

Table 2.9

Maximum Network Speed

Distance

100 m (328 ft)

250 m (820 ft)

500 m (1,640 ft)

Baud Rate

500 Kbps

250 Kbps

125 Kbps

Baud Rate (Data Rate)

DeviceNet communications can use three different baud rates

(data rates) 125k, 250k, and 500k baud. When the switch is set to the PGM position, the unit's baud rate is determined by a software setting. If the switch is set to PGM you must set the data rate using the controller’s front panel or network-configuration software. As long as the switch is set to PGM, the controller will always come back up on the network with the last software-configured baud rate stored in the controller's memory.

As an example, assume the controller's baud rate switch is set to PGM, and it is programmed at 500k baud. Assume too, that the DeviceNet network experiences a power loss. When power is restored, the controller will come back up with a baud rate of 500k baud. If on the other hand, the baud rate switch was changed to 250k baud before the network power had been restored, the controller will attempt to come back on the network at 250k baud.

NOTE!

When changing the baud rate via the software or by manually changing the switch position, you will need to cycle power on the network for the change to take effect.

Node Address (MAC ID)

Valid node addresses on a DeviceNet network range from 0 to

63 decimal. When the switch is set to the PGM position, the unit's node address is determined by a software setting. If the switch is set to “PGM” you must set the node address using the controller’s front panel or network-configuration software. As long as the switch setting remains set for software

42 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 2: Installation selection, the controller will always come back up on the network with the last software configured node address stored in the controller's memory.

Set the controller’s MAC ID with the two rotary switches on the side of the case. Set the most significant digit (MSD) with the left switch and the least significant digit (LSD) with the right switch. For example, to set the address to 23, set the

MSD to 2 and the LSD to 3.

NOTE!

If the node address is changed with the switch, the D8 controller’s power must be cycled before the change takes effect. If the node address is changed using software, the change takes effect immediately.

Status Indicators

Figure 2.29 D8 Side with Rotary Switches

The D8 controller has two indicator lights on the back, one labeled “NET” (Network) and the other labeled “MOD” (Module). On power-up the controller performs a self-test. The indicator light identified as "MOD" displays the result of this test as either pass (green) or fail (red). Also, under normal operation the indicator lights indicate the health of the module and the network. In the event that an indicator light should go from green to red either on power up or afterwards, consult ta-

bles Table 2.10 and Table 2.11 below for basic troubleshoot-

ing.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 43

Chapter 2: Installation Series D8 User’s Guide

Indicator Light

Off

Green

Red

Flashing Green

Flashing Red

Table 2.10

Module Status Indicator Light

Indicator Light

Off

Flashing Green-Red

Green

Red

Description

No power is applied to the device.

The device is performing a Self-Test.

The device is operating normally

The device has detected an unrecoverable fault.

Table 2.11

Network Status Indicator Light

Description

The device is not online.

The device has not completed the duplicate MAC ID test yet.

The device may not be powered. Look at Table 2.10 ,Module Status

Indicator Light.

The device is online and has connections in the established state.

For a Group 2 Only device it means that the device is allocated to a

Master.

Failed communication device.

The device has detected an error that has rendered it incapable of communicating on the network (Duplicate MAC ID, or Bus-off).

The device is online, but no connection has been allocated or an explicit connection has timed out.

A poll connection has timed out.

44 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

3

Communicating by DeviceNet

This chapter explains how to add a D8 series controller to a

DeviceNet network and how to access and manipulate the controller's data over a network using a Programmable Logic

Controller or other device with a DeviceNet scanner. The chapter also includes descriptions of the D8's objects and attributes that are accessible via the DeviceNet protocol.

Accessing Data with a DeviceNet Master

Figure 3.12 to Figure 3.15 starting on page 65 illustrate the in-

puts and outputs in the D8 controller's polled I/O messages.

These messages are typically used to get the controller's data in and out of a master on a DeviceNet network. To use this data in a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) these parameters must be mapped through the master (scanner) to memory locations accessible to the PLC or other control devices.

When configuring the number of input bytes, it is important to note that the first input byte, the Exception Status Byte is not currently used. When configuring the D8 with DeviceNet network software such as RSNetWorx™, you must offset the

polled input data by one byte. See the example in Mapping

Polled I/O Data on page 50.

Software

More than one software package is available to configure devices such as the D8 on a DeviceNet network. This chapter provides step-by-step examples of configuring the D8 controller using Rockwell Software’s RSNetWorx. The methodology used to accomplish this task will be different in other software, but the key steps and the end result, a valid stream

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 45

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide of data from the D8 to the PLC or other device, will be the same.

About The Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)

Most, if not all, vendors supply an EDS file with their DeviceNet products. The EDS file allows for faster and easier configuration with the network software, but it is not required to make the device work. The examples cover commissioning the D8 on a network both with and without the EDS file. EDS files for the D8 are available on the Watlow web site and upon request from Watlow technical support.

NOTE!

There are several versions of the EDS file.

You must use the correct file for the number of loops in the controller (D84, 4-loop, or D88,

8-loop) and the controller firmware revision.

This information is included in the file description on Watlow's web site.

Configuring a D8 Using RSNetWorx

Complete the following steps prior to configuring the DeviceNet network software:

• The physical layer of the DeviceNet network is built.

• At least the D8 controller, a DeviceNet master, and a computer interface are connected to the network.

• Each device has a unique node addresses and the same baud rate setting.

Once all the devices are connected and power is applied to the network:

1. With RSLinx™ select and configure the appropriate communications driver for your hardware.

2. Open RSNetWorx and go online.

46 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Figure 3.1

RSNetWorx On-line with

Found Devices

Figure 3.1 shows node address 1 with a question mark on its

icon, indicating that this device has not yet been registered in

RSNetWorx. At this point the user may register an existing

EDS file or create one. Both options are addressed in the following sections.

Registering the D8 without an EDS File

This section assumes the user does not have an EDS file from

Watlow for the D8 controller but needs to get the unit up and running anyway.

To register the device without the Watlow EDS file:

1. Double-click the device with a question mark.

2. Proceed through the prompts to create an EDS file.

3. Select the polled method (Master/Slave) and then enter

the number of input and output bytes. See Table 3.1.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 47

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 3.1

Number of Bytes

Controller Input Bytes Output Bytes

D84 (4-loop) 41

D88 (8-loop) 81

12

24

Figure 3.2

The D8 Registered in RSNetWorx

Registering the D8 with the Watlow EDS File

There are important differences between the results of registering the D8 controller with and without the Watlow-supplied EDS file, though these differences are not readily visible

in Figure 3.2.

Double-clicking node address 1 (D8 controller) in the RSNet-

Worx graph of the network opens the dialog box shown at the

left in Figure 3.3. When the controller is registered with the

Watlow EDS, the same dialog box has an additional tab labeled Parameters as shown at the right in the figure.

48 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

A. Registered without the Watlow EDS B. Registered with the Watlow EDS

Figure 3.3

D8 Properties in RSNetWorx

The Parameters tab provides access to all of the D8 control-

ler's parameters. See Figure 3.4. Some of these parameters

have read-only access and some have read-and-write access.

This tab can be a valuable tool for configuring the D8. Without the Watlow EDS file all configuration must be done through the front panel of the controller or via explicit messages initiated through a PLC or other device passed through a scanner (DeviceNet master).

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 49

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Figure 3.4

Parameters Tab

Mapping Polled I/O Data

Once the D8 controller is registered, the master must be configured to communicate with it. Once the master is configured it is possible to map the polled I/O data from the D8 to the

PLC. The next sections address these steps.

Adding the D8 to the Master's Scanlist

This section describes configuring the DeviceNet scanner so that it will copy data between the scanner's memory and the

D8 controller.

To add the D8 controller to the scanlist:

1. Double-click the 1747-SDN scanner (see Figure 3.2 on page 48) to open its properties dialog box. The properties

dialog lists the Available Devices and displays the scan-

ner's Scanlist (see Figure 3.5 on page 51). The Scanlist

shows the devices that are mapped into the scanner's memory, the Available Devices list displays the devices that are on the network.

2. Uncheck the Automap on Add option. (When checked the software automatically assigns addresses to data from the

50 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet device starting at the next available byte in the PLC memory. When not checked the user controls how the bytes are arranged.)

3. Select 01 Watlow D84/D88 by clicking it in the Available

Devices list.

4. Click the right-arrow button to put the D8 on the Scanlist.

Figure 3.5

Adding the D8 to the Scanlist

Assigning PLC Addresses

Once the device has been added to the Scanlist, it is possible to map the polled bytes to any available contiguous memory location for both inputs and outputs.

The Allen-Bradley 1747-SDN scanner module in this example consumes the first 32 words of the input and output files corresponding to the slot in which it is inserted. For example, when the module is inserted in slot 3 of the PLC, the scanner uses addresses in the input file I:3.0 through I:3.31. This provides only 32 words of memory. Because the D88 controller supplies 81 bytes or 40.5 words of input, it is necessary to map the incoming polled data to the scanner's M1 file instead.

The following procedure maps the D88's input bytes to the scanner's M1 file. Actually only 40 words or 80 bytes of input data will be mapped because the Exception Status Byte, which is currently unused, is excluded.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 51

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

The Node list in Figure 3.6 indicates that the scanner will

communicate with the D8 via Polled messages. The scanner expects to find 81 bytes, but no data is currently mapped. The figure also shows four other devices on the network and their corresponding communications and data mapping configurations.

52

Figure 3.6

Scanner Input Properties

To map the D8's data:

1. Select the D8 by clicking 01, Watlow D84/D88 in the

Node list on the Input tab.

2. Click the Advanced button to open the Advanced Map- ping

dialog box. See Figure 3.7 on page 53.

3. In the Map From group, for Message, select Polled, and set Byte to 1. (This excludes the first byte.)

4. In the Map To group, for Memory, select M File.

5. Set Bit Length to 640. (80 bytes times 8 bits per byte is

640 bits, the Exception Status Byte is excluded.)

6. Click Apply Mapping.

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Figure 3.7

Advanced Mapping Dialog Box

The D8's polled input data is now mapped to the scanner's M1 file.

The scanner's M0 file may similarly be used to map the DeviceNet output data. The output data is easier to map because

there is no Exception Status Byte to omit. See Poll Connection on page 64 for information on the output data.

Sample Ladder Logic

The following sections give examples of using information from the polled I/O and using explicit messages to read and write data between the D8 controller and a PLC.

Accessing Polled I/O Data

For a better understanding of the ladder logic examples in this

section, refer to Figure 3.14 and Figure 3.15 starting on page

65. These figures illustrate the polled input and output mes-

sages. Because the first byte of the input data, the Exception

Status Byte was excluded, the first word mapped is loop 1's

Process Variable, and it is stored in the scanner's memory at

M1:1.0. The Process Variables for subsequent loops are in the next seven memory locations (M1:1.1 to M1:1.7).

All ladder logic examples that follow were made using an

Allen-Bradley SLC 5/04. Although there are different instruc-

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 53

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide tions from one PLC manufacturer to another, the same concepts apply.

NOTE!

The contents of the scanner's M1 file cannot be monitored directly in RSLogix™, the logic-programming environment used in the following examples. For ease of demonstration and troubleshooting, the relevant registers are copied from the scanner's M1 file to the

PLC's N14 file.

54

Figure 3.8

Using Scanned Data in Logic

For programming convenience the ladder program in

Figure 3.8 copies the portion of the scanner's memory to

which the D8's inputs are mapped into an integer file, N14:0.

This information is automatically polled so it does not require special communication instructions to update values between the D8 and the PLC. During every PLC scan the DeviceNet scanner is queried for the latest values stored in its memory.

The D8 controller stores and communicates Process Variables

and other parameters in tenths of a degree (see Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59). In the logic a divide

function scales the scanned value into whole degrees. The

DIV function block divides the value in N14:0 (923) by 10 and places the temperature (92° F) into N14:43. This value can be used elsewhere in logic, and the programmer will know that the value is in degrees.

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Figure 3.8 also shows the power level for loop 1 being scaled.

The scanned value is also in tenths, so 1000 means 100%

power (see Heat/Cool Output on page 122).

According to Figure 3.14 on page 65, M1:1.8 will hold the Set

Point for loop 1. This value is copied by the ladder logic to

N14:8. The 8 words after the set points, starting at M1:1.16 copied to N14:16 contain the Heat Output power for loops 1

to 8. Figure 3.9 shows the copied values for loop 1 to 8's Pro-

cess Variables and Set Points and the Heat Outputs for loops

1 to 4.

Figure 3.9

Contents of the PLC Memory

Setting a Value with an Explicit Message

The Allen-Bradley 1747-SDN scanner module provides dedicated memory for explicit messages. In this model M0:1.224 is the first of 32 words that may be used for an explicit message (see Allen-Bradley Publication 1747-IN058C-EN-P -

May 2002).

In the first rung of ladder logic in Figure 3.10 on page 56

when the Enable Power Out Write (B17:0/6) is on, the PLC writes to the scanner. At the first off-to-on transition of

B17:0/6 the copy instruction (COP) sends an explicit message to the scanner. In this example, the message changes the Heat

Output for loop 1 to the value specified in N14:56.

NOTE!

The Heat Output can only be set via DeviceNet when the loop is in the Manual Mode.

If the loop's Mode is Off, Tune or Auto, the controller sets the Heat Output.

The copy instruction in the second rung of logic is executed only when a response to a previously sent explicit message is available to be read and interpreted by the ladder program

(I:1/15). If communications is successful with the D8, the copy instruction returns an echo of N14:50 and places it in

N14:60. If this echo occurs, the MVM instruction deletes the transaction from the response queue. If communications is not successful, an error code is returned via N14:60. For all error code definitions, see the Allen-Bradley publication mentioned above.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 55

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

56

Figure 3.10 Explicit Write in Ladder

NOTE!

The numbers shown above in N14:50 through N14:56 and N14:60 through N14:66 are in hexadecimal.

The explicit messages in the example are 7 words long. The outbound transaction header is defined in the first 3 words of the copy instruction. In the figure the header for the first mes-

sage is N14:50, 51, and 52. Table 3.2 lists and describes the

parts of the message header.

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Table 3.2

Outbound Transaction Header

Memory Location

N14:50 MSB

N14:50 LSB

N14:51 MSB

N14:51 LSB

N14:52 MSB

N14:52 LSB

Description Example Value Note

Transaction ID

(TXID)

Command

Port

Data Size (in bytes) 8 hex

Service

MAC ID

1 hex

1 hex

0 hex

10 hex

Unique number for message in the queue

Execute the transmission block

The DeviceNet port

Size of the message body: 8 bytes or 4 words

Get Attribute Single

(See Table 3.21 )

The D8's address 1 hex

Up to 32 words are allocated for an explicit message in the scanner used in the example. The header used 3, leaving 29 for the message body. In this example only 4 words are used in the message body. The first 3 words of the body contain the class, instance and attribute to be accessed. The final word is the data, in this case the new power level sent to the D8.

Table 3.3 lists and describes the parts of the message body.

Table 3.3

Explicit Message Body

Memory Location Description Example Value

N14:53

N14:54

N14:55

N14:55

Class

Instance

Attribute

Data

65 hex

1 hex

64 hex

0 hex

Note

Output Object (See Table 3.21)

Loop 1

Heat Output (See Table 3.23)

Sets the Heat Output to 0%

As another example, if you wanted to change the Heat Output for loop 6, the body of the message would be the same except that the Instance would be 6 hex.

Reading a Value with an Explicit Message

The logic in Figure 3.11 on page 58 initiates an explicit mes-

sage from the PLC to the D8. This message specifies the Get

Attribute Single service (0E hex) rather than the Set Attribute

Single service (10 hex) used in the previous example.

With the class, instance and attribute specified, the PLC gets back the current setting for loop 1's Proportional Band. In this explicit read example you can see not much has changed in the ladder logic. In fact, the logic could be duplicated from the previous example with the only change being the contents of

N14:92.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 57

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Figure 3.11 Explicit Read in Ladder

When I:1/15 comes on, indicating there is a response available to a previously sent message, the controller's loop 1 Proportional Band value is copied to N14:103. Again, if N14:100 comes back as an echo of N14:90 (transaction completed successfully) the MVM instruction deletes the transaction from the response queue.

Setting Parameters via DeviceNet

All values stored in the D8 are bits, integers or strings. Some integers represent settings that appear as text in the controller interface. Some integers represent numeric settings.

This section describes how to interpret values found in the DeviceNet objects.

Non-Numeric Settings

58

With the exceptions of the Loop Name and Units parameters, when the controller interface displays the setting as a word, a

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet phrase and in some cases a number, see the parameter infor-

mation in Chapter 6, Menu and Parameter Reference. The in-

teger value appears in parentheses following each option. Use that integer value when you set or interpret the value of the parameter via DeviceNet.

Bit-Wise Values

Some settings, such as those that enable alarms, are stored as bits within words. To examine the value of just one bit, you can “and” the value with a mask word to extract the particular bit in which you are interested. To set or clear the bit, add or subtract the appropriate value to change the value of the word.

For example, to extract the fourth bit from a value in a bit-wise parameter, you would “and” it with a word that is all zeros except the fourth bit (0000000000001000, or 8 in decimal). To set the bit, add 8 to the value. To clear the bit, subtract 8 from the value.

NOTE!

Throughout this manual, we refer to the least significant bit as the rightmost bit.

Decimal Placement for Numeric Values

Numeric values that are in the loop’s engineering units are stored as integers. The number of decimal places that are assumed when a parameter value is stored in the controller depends upon the Input type and Disp format parameter values

for the loop. See Table 3.4.

Table 3.4

Number of Decimal Places for

Numeric Values via Logic

Input Type

Any thermocouple

RTD

Process

Display Format

-999 to 3000

-999.9 to 3000.0

-999 to 3000

-9999 to 30000

-999.9 to 3000.0

-99.99 to 300.00

-9.999 to 30.000

-0.9999 to 3.0000

Decimal

Places

3

4

1

2

1

0

1

1

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 59

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

To determine the integer value to set in the controller, move the decimal to the right the number of places specified.

For example:

• If a loop has a process input with a display format of

-99.99 to 300.00, values are stored with two decimal places. If you read a value in the set point register of

2500, you should interpret that value as 25.00.

• If a loop has a thermocouple input and you want to set the

Alarm High SP

parameter to 355 through logic, you should set a value of 3550.

Decimal Placement for Percentage Values

Percentage values are stored internally in tenths of a percent, such that 1000 corresponds to 100.0 percent. Divide values by ten when reading, and multiply values by ten before writing.

D8 DeviceNet Overview

The D8 controller is configured as a Group 2 Only Slave device using the Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set.

The D8's DeviceNet interface includes objects in two main categories, DeviceNet Objects and Application Objects. DeviceNet objects handle what is necessary for networking and communications. Application Objects provide access to the

D8 controller's parameters and data.

Master/Slave Connections

The D8 supports the Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set, which calls for the utilization of an Explicit Messaging Connection to manually create and configure Connection Objects within each connection end-point. These Connections are referred to collectively as the Predefined Master/Slave Connec- tion Set

.

The master is the device that gathers and distributes I/O data for the process controller. Slaves are the devices from which the master gathers I/O data and to which the master distributes

I/O data. The master “owns” the slaves whose node addresses appear in its scan list. To determine which slaves it will communicate with, the master examines its scan list and sends commands accordingly. Except for the Duplicate MAC ID

Check, a slave cannot initiate any communication before being told by the master to do so.

60 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Addressing

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

All data is referenced using a four-part definition: Node

(MAC ID) + Class + Instance + Attribute.

Table 3.5

Address Components

Address Component

Node Address (MAC ID)

Class ID

Instance ID

Attribute ID

Range

[0 to 63]

[1 to 255]

[0 to 255]

[1 to 255]

Data Types

The descriptions of attributes in the following sections include

the data type for each. Table 3.6 lists and describes these data

types.

Table 3.6

Elementary Data Types

Type

BOOL

BYTE

EPATH

INT

SHORT_STRING

UDINT

UINT

USINT

WORD

Description

Logical Boolean (TRUE or FALSE)

Bit string (8 bits)

DeviceNet path segments

Signed integer (16 bits)

Character string (1 byte per character, 1 byte length indicator)

Unsigned double integer (32 bits)

Unsigned integer (16 bits)

Unsigned short integer (8 bits)

Bit string (16 bits)

DeviceNet Objects

The following sections describe the standard DeviceNet objects and the D8-specific application objects. Tables in each section identify the class, available services, and the object's class and instance attributes.

Identity Object

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

The Identity object provides identification information for the device. This includes the device manufacturer, product name, product type, serial number and revision.

Watlow Anafaze 61

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 3.7

Identity Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

01 hex

None

01 hex Get Attribute All

05 hex Reset (O,1)

0E hex Get Attribute Single

Table 3.8

Identity Instance Attributes

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex) Get

2 (2 hex) Get

3 (3 hex) Get

4 (4 hex) Get

5 (5 hex) Get

6 (6 hex) Get

7 (7 hex) Get

Name Type

Vendor ID UINT

Product

Type

Product

Code

Revision

UINT

UINT

STRUCT of: 2 USINT

WORD Status

Serial

Number

Product

Name

UDINT

SHORT_

STRING

Description

Identification of each vendor by number.

Watlow has vendor ID 153

Identification of general type of product for vender. The D8 has type 0.

Specific product code: D88 (1); D84 (2).

Revision of the item the Identity Object represents

Summary status of device

Serial number of device

Human readable ID: "WATLOW D88" or

"WATLOW D84"

Message Router Object

The Message Router object provides a messaging connection point through which a client may address a service to any object class or instance residing in the physical device.

Table 3.9

Message Router Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

02 hex

None

04 hex Get Attribute Single

Table 3.10 Message Router Instance Attributes

Attribute Access Name

2 (2 hex) Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Type

Number

Available

Number

Active

UINT

UINT

Description

Maximum number of connections supported. The D8 supports up to 3 connections.

Number of connections currently used by the system components.

62 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

DeviceNet Object

The DeviceNet object is used to provide the configuration and status of a physical attachment to DeviceNet.

Table 3.11 DeviceNet Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

03 hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

08 hex Create

09 hex Delete

Table 3.12 DeviceNet Class Attributes

Attribute Access Name

1 (1 hex) Get

Type Description

Revision UINT Revision of this object

Table 3.13 DeviceNet Instance Attributes

Attribute Access Name Type Description

1 (1 hex) Get/Set 1 MAC ID

2 (2 hex) Get/Set 2 Baud Rate

4 (3 hex)

5 (4 hex)

Get

Get

USINT

USINT

Node Address (0 to 63)

Baud Rate (0 to 2)

Bus-Off Counter

Allocation Info.

USINT

Number of times CAN went to the bus-off state (0 to 255)

STRUCT of: Allocation Information

BYTE Allocation Choice Byte

USINT MAC ID of Master (0 to 63, 255)

1 If the Node Address (MAC ID) rotary switches are set to a value from 0 to 63, the MAC ID attribute has only Get access. If the rotary switches are set to the programmable mode, the MAC ID attribute has both Get and Set ac-

2 cess.

If the Baud Rate (data rate) rotary switch is set to 125, 250 or 500k baud, the Baud Rate attribute has only Get access. If the rotary switches are set to the software programmable mode, the Baud Rate has both Get and Set access.

Assembly Object

The Assembly object binds attributes of multiple objects, which allows data to or from each object to be sent or received over a single connection.

There are several instances of the Assembly object and each has an attribute 3 with controller parameter values for each loop concatenated. For example, an explicit get of instance

100, attribute 3 to a D84 controller returns the four set-point values in one message. This simplifies access to these frequently used parameters.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 63

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 3.14 Assembly Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

04 hex

None

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.15 Assembly Instance Attributes

Instance Attribute Access Name Type Description

100 (64 hex) 3 (3 hex) Get/Set Set Points array 1 of INTs

Set Point of each loop

101 (65 hex) 3 (3 hex)

102 (66 hex) 3 (3 hex)

103 (67 hex) 3 (3 hex)

Get/Set

Get

Get

Modes

Process

Variables array 1 of USINTs Mode of each loop array

Heat Outputs array

1

1

of INTs

of UINTs

Process Variable of each loop

Heat Output of each loop

104 (68 hex) 3 (3 hex)

105 (69 hex) 3 (3 hex)

Get

Get

Cool Outputs

Alarm Status array array

1

1

of UINTs

of UINTs

Cool Output of each loop

Alarm status of each loop

106

(6A hex)

107

(6B hex)

3 (3 hex)

3 (3 hex)

Get/Set

Get

Poll Out

Poll In array array

1

1

of INTs+

of USINTs

BYTE + array array

2

3

of INTs +

of UINTs

Consumed Static

Output

Consumed Static

Input

1

2

3

Array size is equal to the number of loops in the controller (4 in a D84 and 8 in a D88).

Array size is equal to the two times the number of loops in the controller (8 in a D84 and 16 in a D88).

Array size is equal to the three times the number of loops in the controller (12 in a D84 and 24 in a D88).

Poll Connection

The poll connection allows the master to write all set points and control modes in one connection. It also allows the reading of all process variables, set points, heat and cool outputs, and alarm status for all of the loops.

Figure 3.12 to Figure 3.15 illustrate the contents of the polled

I/O messages for the D84 (4-loop) and D88 (8-loop) controllers. The Produced Static Input message is produced by the controller as input to the DeviceNet bus. It is, therefore, output from the controller. The Consumed Static Output message is consumed by the controller. It is, therefore, input to the controller.

64 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Byte Byte

Exception

Status

1 byte

Loop 1 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte

Loop 2 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Figure 3.12 D84 Produced Static Input

Byte Byte

Loop 1 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 2 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Byte Byte

Loop 2 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 4 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Byte

Loop 3 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Byte Byte

Loop 4 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Byte

Figure 3.13 D84 Consumed Static Output

Byte Byte

Exception

Status

1 byte

Loop 1 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 5 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 5 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 5 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 5 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 5 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Byte Byte

Loop 2 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 6 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 6 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 6 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 6 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 2 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 6 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Byte Byte

Loop 3 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 7 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 7 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 7 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 7 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 7 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Byte

Loop 4 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 8 Process Variable

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 8 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 8 Heat Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 8 Cool Output

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 4 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Loop 8 Alarm Status

UINT (2 bytes)

Figure 3.14 D88 Produced Static Input

Byte

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 65

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte Byte

Loop 1 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 5 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 1 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 2 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 2 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 6 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 3 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 4 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 3 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 7 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 5 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 6 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Byte Byte

Loop 4 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 8 Set Point

INT (2 bytes)

Loop 7 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Loop 8 Control

Mode

USINT (1 byte)

Figure 3.15 D88 Consumed Static Output

Connection Object

The Connection Object allocates and manages the internal resources associated with both polled I/O and explicit messaging connections. The specific instance generated by the

Connection Class is referred to as a Connection Instance or a

Connection Object.

Table 3.16 Connection Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

05 hex

None

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.17 Connection Instance Attributes

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex)

2 (2 hex)

3 (3 hex)

Get

Get

Get

4 (4 hex)

5 (5 hex)

6 (6 hex)

7 (7 hex)

8 (8 hex)

9 (9 hex)

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get

Get/Set

Name Type Description

State USINT State of the object

Instance Type USINT Indicates either I/O or Messaging

Transport Class

Trigger

BYTE Defines behavior of the Connection

Produced

Connection ID UINT

Consumed

Connection ID UINT

Initial Comm

Characteristics BYTE

UINT

Placed in CAN Identifier Field when the Connection transmits

CAN Identifier Field value that denotes message to be received

Defines the Message Group(s) across which productions and consumption associated with this Connection when it occurs

Maximum number of bytes transmitted across this Connection

Produced Connection Size

Consumed

Connection

Size

Expected

Packet Rate

UINT

UINT

Maximum number of bytes received across this Connection

Defines timing associated with this Connection

66 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Attribute Access

12 (C hex) Get/Set

13 (D hex) Get

14 (E hex) Get

15 (F hex) Get

16 (10 hex) Get

Name Type

Watchdog

Timeout Action USINT

Produced Connection Path

Length

UINT

Produced Connection Path

Consumed

Connection

Path Length

Consumed

Connection

Path

EPATH

UINT

EPATH

Description

Defines how to handle inactivity or watchdog timeouts; Auto Delete (1), Deferred Delete (3)

Number of bytes in the Produced Connection

Path Attribute

Specifies the Application Object(s) whose data is to be produced by this Connection

Object.

Number of bytes in the Consumed Connection Path Length

Specifies the Application Object(s) that are to receive data consumed by this Connection

Object.

Input Object

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex) Get

2 (2 hex) Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name

Revision

Max Instance

Number of

Instances

The Input Object provides read/write access to all input parameters. Instance 0 of this object contains the class attributes

listed in Table 3.19. The four-loop controller has four addi-

tional instances, and the eight-loop controller has eight additional instances, each containing the attributes listed in

Table 3.20. Instance 1 corresponds to loop 1, instance 2 cor-

responds to loop 2, and so on.

Table 3.18 Input Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

64 hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.19 Input Class Attributes (Instance 0)

Type Description

UINT Revision of this object

UINT Maximum instances of this object (8)

UINT Number of object instances

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 67

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Attribute

100 (64 hex)

101 (65 hex)

102 (66 hex)

103 (67 hex)

104 (68 hex)

105 (69 hex)

106 (6A hex)

107 (6B hex)

108 (6C hex)

109 (6D hex)

110 (6E hex)

111 (6F hex)

112 (70 hex)

Access

Get/Set

Get

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Table 3.20 Input Instance Attributes

(Instances 1 to 4 or 8)

Name Type Description

Set Point INT

Process Variable INT

Input Type

Loop Name

SHORT_STRING

SHORT_STRING

See page 122.

See page 123.

See page 131.

See page 132.

Input Units

Array of 3 USINT See page 132.

Calibration Offset INT

See page 132.

Reverse Thermocouple Detection

BOOL

See page 133.

Display Format USINT

Input Range High INT

Input Range Low INT

Input High Signal INT

Input Low Signal

Input Filter

INT

USINT

See page 133.

See page 134.

See page 135.

See page 134.

See page 135.

See page 135.

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. The response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

Output Object

The Output Object provides read/write access to all output parameters. Instance 0 of this object contains the class attributes

listed in Table 3.22. The four-loop controller has four addi-

tional instances, and the eight-loop controller has eight additional instances, each containing the attributes listed in

Table 3.23. Instance 1 corresponds to loop 1, instance 2 cor-

responds to loop 2, and so on.

Table 3.21 Output Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

65 hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

68 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Attribute

100 (64 hex)

101 (65 hex)

102 (66 hex)

103 (67 hex)

104 (68 hex)

105 (69 hex)

106 (6A hex)

107 (6B hex)

108 (6C hex)

109 (6D hex)

110 (6E hex)

111 (6F hex)

112 (70 hex)

113 (71 hex)

114 (72 hex)

115 (73 hex)

116 (74 hex)

117 (75 hex)

118 (76 hex)

119 (77 hex)

120 (78 hex)

121 (79 hex)

122 (7A hex)

123 (7B hex)

124 (7C hex)

Table 3.22 Output Class Attributes (Instance 0)

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex)

2 (2 hex)

Get

Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name Type

Revision UINT

Max Instance UINT

Number of

Instances

UINT

Description

Revision of this object

Maximum instances of this object (8)

Number of object instances

Table 3.23 Output Instance Attributes

(Instances 1 to 4 or 8)

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Heat Output

Cool Output

Heat Output Type

Cool Output Type

Heat Action

Cool Action

Heat Cycle Time

Cool Cycle Time

Heat Power Limit

Cool Power Limit

Heat Power Limit Time

Cool Power Limit Time

Sensor Fail Heat Output

Sensor Fail Cool Output

Open Thermocouple Heat

Output Average

Open Thermocouple Cool

Output Average

Heat Output Curve

Cool Output Curve

Heat SDAC Signal

Cool SDAC Signal

Heat SDAC Low Signal

Cool SDAC Low Signal

Heat SDAC High Signal

Cool SDAC High Signal

Heat/Cool Output Action for

Watchdog Inactivity Fault

BOOL

USINT

USINT

BOOL

BOOL

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

BOOL

Type

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

USINT

BOOL

BOOL

USINT

USINT

BOOL

Description

See page 122.

See page 122.

See page 139.

See page 139.

See page 141.

See page 141.

See page 140.

See page 140.

See page 141.

See page 141.

See page 141.

See page 141.

See page 142.

See page 142.

See page 142.

See page 142.

See page 143.

See page 143.

See page 140.

See page 140.

See page 140.

See page 140.

See page 140.

See page 140.

See page 156.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 69

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. The response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

Control Object

The Control Object provides read/write access to all control parameters. Instance 0 of this object contains the class at-

tributes listed in Table 3.25. The four-loop controller has four

additional instances, and the eight-loop controller has eight additional instances, each containing the attributes listed in

Table 3.26. Instance 1 corresponds to loop 1, instance 2 cor-

responds to loop 2, and so on.

Table 3.24 Control Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

66 hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.25 Control Class Attributes (Instance 0)

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex)

2 (2 hex)

Get

Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name Type

Revision UINT

Max Instance UINT

Number of

Instances

UINT

Description

Revision of this object

Maximum instances of this object (8)

Number of object instances

Attribute

100 (64 hex)

101 (65 hex)

102 (66 hex)

103 (67 hex)

104 (68 hex)

105 (69 hex)

106 (6A hex)

107 (6B hex)

108 (6C hex)

Table 3.26 Control Instance Attributes

(Instances 1 to 4 or 8)

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Heat Proportional Band

Cool Proportional Band

Heat Integral

Cool Integral

Heat Derivative

Cool Derivative

Heat Manual Reset

Cool Manual Reset

Heat Filter

Type

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

USINT

UINT

UINT

USINT

Description

See page 136.

See page 136.

See page 137.

See page 137.

See page 137.

See page 137.

See page 137.

See page 137.

See page 137.

70 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Attribute

109 (6D hex)

110 (6E hex)

111 (6F hex)

112 (70 hex)

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Cool Filter

Hysteresis

Restore Automatic Mode

Mode

Type

USINT

UINT

USINT

USINT

Description

See page 137.

See page 138.

See page 138.

See page 122.

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. The response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

Alarm Object

The Alarm Object provides read/write access to all alarm parameters. Instance 0 of this object contains the class attributes

listed in Table 3.28. The four-loop controller has four addi-

tional instances, and the eight-loop controller has eight additional instances, each containing the attributes listed in

Table 3.29. Instance 1 corresponds to loop 1, instance 2 cor-

responds to loop 2, and so on.

Table 3.27 Alarm Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

67 hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.28 Alarm Class Attributes (Instance 0)

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex) Get

2 (2 hex) Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name Type Description

Revision

Max Instance

UINT

UINT

Revision of this object

Maximum instances of this object (8)

Number of Instances UINT Number of object instances

Table 3.29 Alarm Instance Attributes

(Instances 1 to 4 or 8)

Attribute Access Name

100 (64 hex) Get/Set Alarm High Set Point

101 (65 hex) Get/Set Alarm Low Set Point

102 (66 hex) Get/Set High Deviation Value

103 (67 hex) Get/Set Low Deviation Value

Type Description

INT

INT

UINT

UINT

See page 143.

See page 146.

See page 145.

See page 145.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 71

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Attribute Access Name Type Description

104 (68 hex) Get/Set Alarm Hysteresis

105 (69 hex) Get/Set Alarm High Output

UINT

See page 147.

USINT

See page 144.

106 (6A hex) Get/Set Alarm Low Output USINT

See page 146.

107 (6B hex) Get/Set High Deviation Output USINT

See page 145.

108 (6C hex) Get/Set Low Deviation Output

109 (6D hex) Get/Set Alarm Delay

110 (6E hex) Get Alarm Status

111 (6F hex) Get/Set Alarm Enable

112 (70 hex) Get/Set Alarm Function

113 (71 hex) Get/Set Alarm Acknowledge

USINT

See page 146.

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

UINT

See page 147.

See page 154.

See page 153.

See page 154.

See page 153.

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. the response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

PV Retransmit Object

The PV Retransmit Object provides read/write access to all process variable retransmit parameters. Instance 0 of this ob-

ject contains the class attributes listed in Table 3.31. The four-

loop controller has four additional instances, and the eightloop controller has eight additional instances, each containing

the attributes listed in Table 3.32. Instance 1 corresponds to

loop 1, instance 2 corresponds to loop 2, and so on.

Table 3.30 PV Retransmit Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

68 hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.31 PV Retransmit Class Attributes

(Instance 0)

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex)

2 (2 hex)

Get

Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name Type

Revision UINT

Max Instance UINT

Number of

Instances

UINT

Description

Revision of this object

Maximum instances of this object (8)

Number of object instances

72 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Table 3.32 PV Retransmit Instance Attributes

(Instances 1 to 4 or 8)

Attribute Access Name

100 (64 hex) Get/Set Heat Output Retransmit

101 (65 hex) Get/Set Cool Output Retransmit

102 (66 hex) Get/Set Heat Retransmit Low Process Variable

103 (67 hex) Get/Set Cool Retransmit Low Process Variable

104 (68 hex) Get/Set Heat Retransmit High Process Variable

105 (69 hex) Get/Set Cool Retransmit High Process Variable

Type Description

USINT See page 148.

USINT See page 148.

INT

INT

See page 148.

See page 148.

INT

INT

See page 148.

See page 148.

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. The response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

Ratio Object

The Ratio Object provides read/write access to all ratio parameters. Instance 0 of this object contains the class attributes

listed in Table 3.34. The four-loop controller has four addi-

tional instances, and the eight-loop controller has eight additional instances, each containing the attributes listed in

Table 3.35. Instance 1 corresponds to loop 1, instance 2 cor-

responds to loop 2, and so on.

Table 3.33 Ratio Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

69 hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.34 Ratio Class Attributes (Instance 0)

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex) Get

2 (2 hex) Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name

Revision

Max

Instance

Number of

Instances

Type

UINT

UINT

UINT

Description

Revision of this object

Maximum instances of this object (8)

Number of object instances

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 73

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Attribute

100 (64 hex)

101 (65 hex)

102 (66 hex)

103 (67 hex)

104 (68 hex)

Table 3.35 Ratio Instance Attributes

(Instances 1 to 4 or 8)

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Ratio Master Loop

Ratio Low Set Point

Ratio High Set Point

Control Ratio

Ratio Set Point Differential

Type

USINT

INT

INT

UINT

INT

Description

See page 150.

See page 150.

See page 151.

See page 151.

See page 151.

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. The response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

Cascade Object

The Cascade Object provides read/write access to all cascade parameters. Instance 0 of this object contains the class at-

tributes listed in Table 3.37. The four-loop controller has four

additional instances, and the eight-loop controller has eight additional instances, each containing the attributes listed in

Table 3.38. Instance 1 corresponds to loop 1, instance 2 cor-

responds to loop 2, and so on.

Table 3.36 Cascade Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

6A hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.37 Cascade Class Attributes

(Instance 0)

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex) Get

2 (2 hex) Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name

Revision

Max

Instance

Number of

Instances

Type

UINT

UINT

UINT

Description

Revision of this object

Maximum instances of this object (8)

Number of object instances

74 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet

Attribute

100 (64 hex)

101 (65 hex)

102 (66 hex)

Table 3.38 Cascade Instance Attributes

(Instances 1 to 4 or 8)

Access

Get/Set

Get/Set

Get/Set

Name

Cascade Primary Loop

Cascade Low Set Point

Cascade High Set Point

Type

USINT

INT

INT

Description

See page 149.

See page 149.

See page 149.

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. The response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

Global Object

The Global Object provides read/write access to all global parameters. Instance 0 contains the class attributes listed in

Table 3.40. Instance 1 contains the attributes listed in

Table 3.41.

Table 3.39 Global Class and Services

Class Code

Class Services

Instance Services

6B hex

0E hex Get Attribute Single

0E hex Get Attribute Single

10 hex Set Attribute Single

Table 3.40 Global Class Attributes (Instance 0)

Attribute Access

1 (1 hex)

2 (2 hex)

Get

Get

3 (3 hex) Get

Name Type

Revision UINT

Max Instance UINT

Number of

Instances

UINT

Description

Revision of this object

Maximum instances of this object (1)

Number of object instances (1)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 75

Chapter 3: Communicating by DeviceNet Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 3.41 Global Instance Attributes

(Instance 1)

Attribute Access Name Type Description

100 (64 hex) Get/Set

101 (65 hex) Get/Set

102 (66 hex) Get/Set

103 (67 hex) Get/Set

104 (68 hex) Get/Set

105 (69 hex) Get/Set

106 (6A hex) Get/Set

107 (6B hex) Get/Set

108 (6C hex) Get/Set

109 (6D hex) Get/Set

110 (6E hex) Get/Set

111 (6F hex) Get/Set

112 (70 hex) Get

113 (71 hex) Get/Set

114 (72 hex) Get/Set

115 (73 hex) Get/Set

116 (74 hex) Get

117 (75 hex) Get

118 (76 hex) Get

119 (77 hex) Get

120 (78 hex) Get

Load Setup From Job

Save Setup As Job

BCD Job Load

BCD Job Load Logic

Mode Override

Mode Override Digital Input Active BOOL

Power Up Alarm Delay

Power Up Loop Mode

Keypad Lock

Thermocouple Short Alarm

AC Line Frequency

Digital Output Alarm Polarity

Ambient Sensor

Battery Status

HW Ambient Status

HW Offset Status

HW Gain Status

USINT

See page 125.

USINT

See page 125.

USINT

See page 126.

BOOL

USINT

See page 127.

USINT

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

INT

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

BOOL

* Least significant bit (LSB) is digital input 1, most significant bit (MSB) is digital input 8.

See page 126.

See page 128.

See page 128.

See page 128.

BOOL

See page 129.

USINT

See page 129.

See page 129.

See page 129.

Digital Inputs 1 (LSB) to 8 (MSB)* USINT

See page 152.

Digital Outputs 1 (LSB) to 8 (MSB) USINT

See page 153.

Digital Outputs 9 (LSB) to 16 (MSB) USINT

See page 153.

Digital Outputs 17 (LSB) to 18 USINT

See page 153.

See page 155.

OK = 0; Fault = 1

OK = 0; Fault = 1

OK = 0; Fault = 1

OK = 0; Fault = 1

NOTE!

All successful explicit message responses from a Set service will contain no data. The response will be a two-byte message containing the requester’s node address and service code (with R/R bit set).

76 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

4

Operation and Setup

This chapter explains how to use the keypad and display to operate the controller. This chapter also explains the basic concepts that you need to understand to set up and operate the controller.

General Navigation Map

The normal display on the D8 is the loop display. Figure 4.1

shows how to navigate from the loop display to other displays, menus and parameters.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 77

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Loop Display

01 925 ∞C

1000auto100

Hold 3 seconds

Scanning Loop Display

01 925 ∞C

02 1025∞C

03 1050∞C

1050auto 0

><

Job Display (if a job is loaded)

Job 1 running

Hold 3 seconds

Setup Menus lGlobal setup r

Other menus b

LOOP

Same Screen on the

Next or Previous Loop

02 1025∞C

1050auto100

.

Operator Parameters l01 Set point r l01 Mode r

^manual l01 Heat out r

% l01 Cool out r

b 0 %

Figure 4.1

General Navigation Map

78 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Keypad

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup l01 Set point r

b 1000ËšC

Key x

>

<

Description

Access the setup menus (press and hold for 3 seconds).

Cancel a change without saving.

Escape from a parameter to a top-level setup menu.

Escape from a setup menu to the loop display or job display.

Acknowledge an alarm.

Toggle between the loop display and job display (if a job is loaded).

Edit a parameter value.

Scroll through the top-level setup menus.

Toggle between the loop display and job display (if a job is loaded).

Edit a parameter value.

Scroll through the top-level setup menus.

Clear RAM and set all parameters to defaults (hold during power up).

Save a change and go to the previous parameter.

,

.

Access the operator parameters (from the loop display).

Save a change and go to the next parameter.

p

Go to a different loop.

Save a change and go to a different loop.

Go to the scanning loop display (hold + for 3 seconds).

i Get more information about the current screen.

Figure 4.2

Keypad Navigation

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 79

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Displays

Loop Display

80

Series D8 User’s Guide

The loop display shows detailed information about a loop.

Process

Variable

Engineering

Units

Loop Name

01 925 ËšCc 0

1000manh100

Cool and

Heat Output

Power

Set Point

Control Mode (see Table 4.1)

Figure 4.3

Loop Display

The control modes are described in Table 4.1.

Table 4.1

Control Modes

Control

Mode

Description off man auto heat cool tun

(blank)

The loop is set to off. One or both outputs are enabled but both outputs are at 0%.

The loop is in manual control. One or both outputs are enabled.

The loop is in automatic control. Only one output (heat or cool) is enabled.

The heat and cool outputs are enabled. The loop is in automatic control and heating.

The heat and cool outputs are enabled. Loop is in automatic control and cooling.

The loop is in autotune mode.

The heat and cool outputs are both disabled.

NOTE!

If the input type for a loop is set to “skip,” the loop display will be blank for that loop.

The scanning loop display sequentially displays the information for each loop. The data for each loop displays for one second. To activate the scanning loop display, go to the loop display, then press and hold the + side of the p key for three seconds. To exit the scanning mode, press any key.

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Alarm Displays

If an alarm condition occurs, the controller displays an alarm code or alarm message.

Two-Character Alarm Codes

If a process, deviation, ambient warning or failed sensor alarm occurs, a two-character alarm code appears in the lower left corner of the loop display.

The alarm code blinks and you cannot change the display until the alarm has been acknowledged. After the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm code stops blinking. The alarm code remains on the display until the condition that caused the alarm is corrected.

Alarm Code

01 925 ËšCc 0

TO 1000manh100

Figure 4.4

Loop Display with Alarm Code

For more information about alarms, see Setting Up Alarms on page 93 and Process Alarms on page 95.

Failed Sensor Alarm Messages

If the alarm is for a failed sensor, an alarm message appears in

the first line of the loop display, as shown in Figure 4.5.

Alarm Message

Alarm Code

01 T/C open c 0

TO 1000manh 0

Figure 4.5

Display for Failed Sensor Alarm

Table 4.2 describes the alarm codes and messages for process

alarms and failed sensor alarms.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 81

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 4.2

Alarm Codes and Messages for

Process and Failed Sensor Alarms

AH

AL

HD

LD

Alarm

Code

AW

TO

TR

TS

RO

RF

Alarm

Message

Description

(No message)

(No message)

RTD open

RTD fail

Alarm high. See Alarm High and Alarm Low on page 96.

Alarm low. See Alarm High and Alarm Low on page 96.

(No message)

(No message)

(No message)

T/C open

T/C reversed

High deviation alarm. See Deviation Alarms on page 96.

Low deviation alarm. See Deviation Alarms on page 96.

Ambient Warning: The controller is within 5°C of its operating temper-

ature limits. See Ambient Warning on page 160.

Thermocouple open. See Thermocouple Open Alarm on page 94.

Thermocouple reversed. See Thermocouple Reversed Alarm on page 94.

T/C shorted

Thermocouple shorted. See Thermocouple Short Alarm on page 94.

RTD open. See RTD Open and RTD Fail Alarms on page 94.

RTD open or shorted. See RTD Open and RTD Fail Alarms on page

94.

For details about the condition that causes each alarm, see Setting Up Alarms on page 93.

How to Acknowledge an Alarm

To acknowledge a process alarm, failed sensor alarm or system alarm, press x. If there are other loops with alarm conditions, the alarm display switches to the next loop that has an alarm. Acknowledge all alarms to clear the global alarm digital output.

The keypad and display will not work for anything else until you acknowledge each alarm. The alarm code or message persists as long as the alarm condition exists.

System Alarm Messages

If a system alarm occurs, the alarm message replaces the entire display. The message persists until the condition is corrected and the alarm is acknowledged.

Table 4.3 describes system alarm messages. For more infor-

mation, see the Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring chapter.

82 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Message

Low power

Battery dead

H/W error:

Ambient

H/W error:

Gain

H/W error:

Offset

Job Display

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Table 4.3

System Alarm Messages

Description

The power supply has failed. See Low Power on page 163.

The RAM battery in the D8 is not functioning correctly, and stored data

has been corrupted. See Battery Dead on page 163.

The temperature around the controller is outside of the acceptable range

of -5 to 55°C. See H/W Error: Ambient on page 165.

Hardware failed because of excessive voltage on inputs. See H/W Error:

Gain or Offset on page 164.

The job display appears if you load a job from memory. If you load a job using the Load setup from job parameter, the job display shows the following screen:

Job 1 running

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

If the job was loaded using digital inputs, the display shows this screen:

Job 1 running remotely loaded

If parameters are modified while the job is running, the display shows this screen:

Job 1 running

Data modified

To toggle between the job display and the loop display, press

> or <.

Watlow Anafaze 83

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Changing the Set Point

How to Manually Change the Set Point

Start at the loop display and follow these steps:

1. Press p to choose the appropriate loop.

2. Press .. The Set point parameter should appear. If noth-

ing happens, the keypad may be locked; see Keypad

Lock on page 129. Also, the Set point parameter is not

available if cascade control or ratio control is enabled on the loop.

3. Press > or < to adjust the set point value.

4. Press , to save the value and return to the loop display, or

press p to save the value and switch to the set point for another loop, or press x to cancel changes.

5. On the loop display, the new set point value is shown on the second line.

Set Point

01 925 ËšCc 0

1000manh100

Other Methods of Changing the Set Point

You can use other methods to change the set point:

Cascade Control:

Use the output of one loop to adjust

the set point of another loop. See Setting Up Cascade

Control on page 100.

Ratio Control:

Use the process variable of one loop, multiplied by a ratio, as the set point of another loop. See

Setting Up Ratio Control on page 104.

Differential Control:

Use the process variable of one loop, plus an offset value, as the set point of another loop.

See Setting Up Differential Control on page 106.

Remote Analog Set Point:

Use an external device such

as a PLC to control the set point. See Setting Up Remote

Analog Set Point on page 107.

Communications:

Use a computer program or operator

interface panel to change the set point. See Chapter 3:

Communicating by DeviceNet.

84 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Changing the Control Mode and Output Power

The D8 has four control modes:

Off:

Outputs are at 0%.

Automatic:

The controller automatically adjusts the output power according to the set point, process variables and other control parameters.

Manual:

You set the output power level.

Autotune:

The controller calculates the best PID settings

for optimum control. For more information, see Autotuning on page 91.

To change the control mode and output power level, start at the loop display and do the following:

1. Press p to choose the appropriate loop.

2. Press . twice. The Mode parameter should appear. (If

nothing happens, the keypad may be locked; see Keypad

Lock on page 129).

NOTE!

If the heat and cool outputs are disabled on this loop, the Mode parameter is not available. Instead, this message appears:

l01 Mode r outputs disabled

3. Press > or < to choose a control mode. If you make a change and want to cancel it, press x.

4. Press . to save the new value.

5. If you chose manual mode, then the next parameter is the

Heat output

or Cool output parameter. Use these parameters to set the heat and cool output power levels, then press . to save.

6. You should be back at the loop display. The control mode is shown on the second line of the loop display; see

Table 4.1 on page 80.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 85

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Accessing and Navigating the Setup Menus

Use the setup menus to configure the controller. For a list of

all setup menus and parameters, refer to Figure 6.2 on page

124.

How to Access the Setup Menus

To access the setup menus, press and hold x for three seconds, until the Global setup menu appears.

To prevent unauthorized personnel from accessing setup parameters, the controller reverts to the regular display if you do not press any keys for three minutes.

How to Edit a Setup Parameter

To edit a setup parameter, go to the appropriate setup menu, go to the parameter, then edit the value:

1. Press and hold x for three seconds to access the setup menus.

2. Press < to go to the appropriate a menu.

3. If applicable, press p to choose the loop that you want to edit.

4. Press . to go to the parameter that you want to edit.

5. To edit a parameter:

• Press < or > to choose a value.

• Press . to save the new value and go to the next parameter.

• Press x to cancel a change without saving.

6. Repeat from step 4 to edit another parameter in the current menu.

7. Press x to return to the top-level menus.

8. Repeat from step 2 to go to another menu, or press x to exit the setup menus.

For information about setting parameters through communications, see Appendix A, DeviceNet Interface.

86 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Setting Up Closed-Loop Control

Closed-loop control is used to control an output based on feedback from a sensor or other signal.

Feedback

The controller receives electrical signals, or feedback, from a sensor or other device. The input parameters determine how the controller interprets the signal. The controller interprets or scales the input signal in engineering units such as °C or °F.

Control Algorithm

Control Output Signal Forms

The output level calculated by the controller is represented by a percentage (0 to 100 percent) of power to be applied. That value is applied on a digital or analog output according to the

user-selected output type. See Heat/Cool Output Type on page 139 for more information about the output types avail-

able.

Heat and Cool Outputs

When the controller is in automatic control mode and a set point is supplied, the controller determines the appropriate output signal.

The controller calculates the output signal based on the feedback and the control algorithm. Each loop may use either on/off control or any combination of proportional, integral and derivative (PID) control. See the Tuning and Control chapter for information about these control modes.

In some applications, two outputs may be controlled according to one input. For example, a loop with both heat and cooling water flow might be controlled according to feedback from one thermocouple.

In such systems, the control algorithm includes provisions to avoid switching too frequently between the heat and cool outputs. The on/off algorithm uses a hysteresis parameter. The

PID algorithms use both a hysteresis parameter and the PID parameters to determine when control switches between heating and cooling.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 87

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

How to Set Up Closed-Loop Control

To set up closed-loop control:

• Use the Input menu to specify the type of input signal and, if necessary, how to scale that signal.

• Use the Control menu to specify PID parameters and the control hysteresis.

• Use the Output menu to enable the heat and cool outputs and to specify other output parameters.

• Provide a set point:

• To use cascade control to adjust the set point of the loop, set up the Cascade menu.

• To use ratio control, differential control, or remote analog set point, set up the Ratio menu.

• To manually adjust the set point of the loop, use the

Set point

parameter to enter the set point. See

Changing the Set Point on page 84.

Put the controller in automatic mode. See Changing the

Control Mode and Output Power on page 85.

For more information about the setup menus and parameters, see the Menu and Parameter Reference chapter.

Setting Up a Process Input

If you use a process input signal, you must set up scaling parameters in the Input menu to scale the raw input signals to the engineering units of the process.

Input Scaling

To scale the input, you enter values that represent two points on a conversion line. Each point indicates an input signal level and the corresponding process value.

The input signal is expressed as percent of full range. For example, for a 0 to 20 mA process input, 0 mA is 0 percent, 10 mA is 50 percent, and so on.

The conversion line scales the input signal to the engineering

units of the process. For example, in Figure 4.6, a 20 percent

input signal corresponds to 8 pounds per square inch (PSI), and a 100 percent signal corresponds to 28 PSI.

88 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

28

8

0% 20%

Input Signal

Figure 4.6

Input Scaling

100%

The range for set points and alarms is bound by the process variables that correspond to the 0 percent and 100 percent input signals. Bear in mind that the range for set points and alarms is not bound by the low and high process variable ranges that you enter in the scaling parameters.

Input Scaling Example: 4 to 20 mA Sensor

Situation

Suppose the controller has a 0 to 20 mA process input that is connected to a pressure sensor. The pressure sensor has a range of 4 to 20 mA, representing 0.0 to 50.0 pounds per square inch (PSI).

Setup

Set the scaling parameters in the Input menu as follows:

• For the Input type parameter, choose process.

• For the Disp format parameter, choose -999.9to 3000.0, because the sensor measures PSI in tenths.

• For the Input signal low and Input signal high parameters, use the minimum and maximum range of the sensor.

In this case, the sensor range is 4 to 20 mA. The range must be expressed in percent of full scale. To determine the percentages, divide the minimum and maximum sensor range (4 mA and 20 mA) by the maximum signal that the controller can accept (20 mA):

Input signal low

= 4 mA/20 mA = 0.2 = 20%

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 89

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Input signal high

= 20 mA/20 mA = 1.0 = 100%

• For the Input range low and Input range high parameters, enter the process values that correspond to the low and high signals. In this case, a 20 percent (4 mA) signal represents 0.0 PSI. A 100 percent (20 mA) signal represents

50.0 PSI.

Table 4.4

Input Readings

Process

Variable

Displayed

50.0 PSI

.0 PSI

Sensor

Input

20 mA

4 mA

Reading in

Percent of Full Scale

100%

100% x (4 mA/20 mA) = 20%

Table 4.5

Scaling Values

Parameter

Input range high

Input high signal

Input range low

Input low signal

Value

50.0 PSI

100.0%

.0 PSI

20.0%

Input Scaling Example: 0 to 5 Vdc Sensor

Situation

A flow sensor connected to the controller measures the flow in a pipe. The sensor generates a 0 to 5 Vdc signal. Independent calibration measurements of the flow in the pipe indicate that the sensor generates 0.5 V at 3 gallons per minute (GPM) and 4.75 V at 65 GPM. The calibration instrument is accurate

±1 GPM.

Setup

For the Disp format parameter in the Input menu, choose

-999to 3000

, because the calibrating instrument is precise to

±1 GPM.

The tables below show the minimum and maximum input signals and their corresponding process variables, and the resulting values for the scaling parameters.

90 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Table 4.6

Input Readings and Calculations

Process

Variable

Displayed

65 GPM

3 GPM

Sensor

Input

Reading in

Percent of Full Scale

4.75 V (4.75 V / 5.00 V) x 100% = 95%

0.5 V (0.5 V / 5.00 V) x 100% = 10%

Table 4.7

Scaling Values

Parameter

Input range high

Input high signal

Input range low

Input low signal

Value

65 GPM

95.0%

3 GPM

10.0%

Autotuning

Autotuning is a process by which a controller calculates the correct PID parameters for optimum control. Only the heat output of a loop may be autotuned.

How Does Autotuning Work?

Autotuning is performed at the maximum allowed output. If an output limit has been set, then autotuning occurs at that value. Otherwise, the control output is set to 100 percent.

The PID constants are calculated according to process response to the output. The loop need not reach or cross the set point to successfully determine the PID parameters.

The controller looks at the delay between when power is applied and when the system responds and uses this information to determine the proportional band. The controller then looks for the slope of the rising temperature to become constant to determine the integral term. The controller mathematically derives the derivative term from the integral term.

When the controller finishes autotuning a loop, it switches the loop to automatic mode. If the process reaches 80 percent of the set point or the autotuning time exceeds 30 minutes, the controller switches the loop to automatic mode and applies the

PID constants it has calculated up to that point.

Autotuning is started at ambient temperature or at a temperature above ambient. However, the temperature must be stable

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 91

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide and there must be sufficient time for the controller to determine the new PID parameters.

Prerequisites

Before autotuning, the controller must be installed with control and sensor circuitry and the thermal load in place. It must be safe to operate the thermal system, and the approximate desired operating temperature (set point) must be known.

The technician or engineer performing the autotune should know how to use the controller keypad or HMI software interface to do the following:

• Select a loop.

• Change the set point.

• Change the control mode (manual, automatic, off or tune).

• Read and change the setup parameters.

How to Autotune a Loop

NOTE!

The loop must be stable at a temperature well below the set point in order to successfully autotune. The controller will not complete tuning if the temperature exceeds 80 percent of set point before the new parameters are found.

To autotune a loop:

1. Go to the loop display (see Loop Display on page 80) and

press p to choose the loop to autotune.

2. Verify that process is stable.

3. Put the loop into manual control mode (see page 85).

4. Enter a set point value as near the normal operating tem-

perature as is safe for the system (see page 84).

WARNING!

During autotuning, the controller sets the output to 100 percent until the process variable rises to 80 percent of set point. Enter a set point that is within the safe operating limits of your system.

92 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

5. Access the setup menus (see page 86). Go to the Input fil-

ter

parameter in the Input menu. Write down the value, and then change it to 0 scans. Press . to save the new setting.

6. Press x twice to return to the loop display.

7. Set the Mode parameter to tune (see page 85).

8. The controller will automatically return to the loop display. The word tun flashes throughout the tuning process.

When tuning is complete, the control mode indicator changes to auto.

9. Adjust the set point to the desired operating temperature

(see page 84).

10. Restore the Input filter parameter to its original value.

Setting Up Alarms

The D8 has three main types of alarms:

• Failed sensor alarms

• Process alarms

• System alarms

Failed Sensor Alarms

Failed sensor alarms alert you if one of the following conditions occurs:

• Thermocouple open

• Thermocouple shorted (must be enabled)

• Thermocouple reversed (enabled by default)

• RTD open positive input or open negative input

• RTD short between the positive and negative inputs

What Happens if a Failed Sensor Alarm Occurs?

If a failed sensor alarm occurs:

• The controller switches to manual mode at the output power indicated by the Sensor fail heat output and Sen- sor fail cool output

parameters in the Output menu. (The output power may be different for a thermocouple open

alarm; see Thermocouple Open Alarm below.)

• The controller displays an alarm code and alarm message

on the display. See Alarm Displays on page 81.

• The global alarm output is activated.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 93

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Thermocouple Open Alarm

The thermocouple open alarm occurs if the controller detects a break in a thermocouple or its leads.

If a thermocouple open alarm occurs, the controller switches to manual mode. The output level is determined as follows:

• If the Open T/C ht/cl out average parameter in the Output menu is set to on, then the controller sets the output power to an average of the recent output.

• If the Open T/C ht/cl out average parameter is set to off, then the controller sets the output to the level indicated by the Sensor fail heat/cool output parameter in the Out- put

menu.

Thermocouple Reversed Alarm

The thermocouple reversed alarm occurs if the temperature goes in the opposite direction and to the opposite side of ambient temperature than expected—for example, a loop is heating and the measured temperature drops below the ambient temperature.

The thermocouple reversed alarm is enabled by default. If false alarms occur in your application, you can disable the alarm by setting the Reversed T/C detect parameter to off. See

Reversed Thermocouple Detection on page 133.

Thermocouple Short Alarm

The thermocouple short alarm occurs if the process power is on and the temperature does not rise or fall as expected. To enable the thermocouple short alarm, you must do the following:

• Choose a digital input for the TC short alarm parameter in the Global setup menu.

• Connect the digital input to a device that connects the input to controller common when the process power is on.

RTD Open and RTD Fail Alarms

The RTD open alarm occurs if the controller detects that the positive RTD lead is broken or disconnected.

The RTD fail alarm occurs if the controller detects any of the following conditions:

• negative lead is broken or disconnected

• common lead is broken or disconnected

• positive and negative leads are shorted

• positive and common leads are shorted

• positive, negative and common leads are shorted

94 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

The RTD alarms are enabled on any channel with Input Type set to RTD.

Restore Automatic Control After a Sensor Failure

This feature returns a loop to automatic control after a failed sensor is repaired. To enable this feature:

• Choose a digital input for the RestoreAuto parameter in the Control menu.

• Connect the digital input to the dc common terminal on the controller.

Process Alarms

The D8 has four process alarms, each of which you can configure separately for each loop:

• Alarm low

• Alarm high

• Low deviation alarm

• High deviation alarm

What Happens if a Process Alarm Occurs?

If a process alarm occurs, the controller does the following:

Shows an alarm code on the display. See Alarm Displays on page 81.

Activates the global alarm output. See Global Alarm on page 97.

• Activates the digital output that is assigned to the process alarm (if applicable). The digital output remains active until the process variable returns within the corresponding limit and hysteresis. The alarm output deactivates when the process returns to normal.

Process Alarm Outputs

Any digital output that is not used as a control output can be assigned to one or more process alarms.

The controller activates the output if any alarm assigned to the output is active. Process alarm outputs are non-latching—that is, the output is deactivated when the process returns to normal, whether or not the alarm has been acknowledged.

Specify the active state of process alarm outputs at the D/O alarm polarity

setting in the Global setup menu.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 95

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Alarm Function: Standard Alarm or Boost Output

You can configure each process alarm as either a standard alarm or a boost alarm:

• A standard alarm provides traditional alarm functionality: The operator must acknowledge the alarm message on the controller display, a latching global alarm is activated, and the alarm can activate a user-specified nonlatching alarm output.

• A boost alarm provides on/off control output using the alarm set points. For example, you could configure a high deviation alarm to turn on a fan. The alarm activates a user-specified non-latching output. Alarm messages do not have to be acknowledged, and the global alarm is not activated.

Alarm High and Alarm Low

An alarm high occurs if the process variable rises above a user-specified value. An alarm low occurs if the process vari-

able drops below a separate user-specified value. See Figure

4.7

Enter the alarm high and low set points at the Alarm high SP and Alarm low SP parameters in the Alarms menu.

Alarm high on

Alarm high SP

Set point + HiDeviation value

High deviation alarm on

Alarm high off

High deviation alarm off

} Hysteresis

} Hysteresis

Set point

Set point - HiDeviation value

Alarm low SP

Low deviation alarm on

Alarm low on

Low deviation alarm off

} Hysteresis

Alarm low off

} Hysteresis

Figure 4.7

Activation and Deactivation of

Process Alarms

Deviation Alarms

96

A deviation alarm occurs if the process deviates from set point

by more than a user-specified amount; see Figure 4.7. You can

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup set separate high and low deviation values at the HiDeviation value

and LoDeviation value parameters in the Alarms menu.

Upon power up or when the set point changes, the behavior of the deviation alarms depends upon the alarm function:

• If the alarm function parameter is set to standard, then deviation alarms do not activate until the after the process variable has first come within the deviation alarm band. This prevents nuisance alarms.

• If the alarm function parameter is set to boost, then the deviation output switches on whenever the set point and process variable differ by more than the deviation setting, regardless of whether the process variable has been within the deviation band. This allows you to use boost control upon power up and set point changes.

Global Alarm

The D8 comes equipped with a global alarm output. The global output is activated if one or more of the following conditions occurs:

• A system alarm occurs, or

• A failed sensor alarm occurs and is unacknowledged, or

• A process alarm occurs and is unacknowledged. The global alarm occurs only if the alarm function is set to stan- dard

in the Alarms menu. (The global alarm does not occur if the alarm function is set to boost.)

The global alarm output stays active until all alarms have been acknowledged.

When the global alarm output is active, it conducts current to the controller’s dc common. When the global alarm output is not active, it does not conduct current.

NOTE!

You cannot configure any parameters for the global alarm. The active state of the global

alarm output is NOT affected by the D/O alarm polarity parameter in the Global setup menu.

Setting Up Process Variable Retransmit

The process variable retransmit feature retransmits the process variable of one loop (primary) via the control output of another loop (secondary). This signal is linear and proportional to the engineering units of the primary loop input.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 97

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Typical uses include data logging to analog recording systems, and long distance transmission of the primary signal to avoid signal degradation. The retransmitted signal can also be used as an input to other types of control systems such as a

PLC.

Any available heat or cool output may be used as a retransmit output. Any process variable may be retransmitted, including the input from the same loop.

To get a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 5 Vdc signal, the controller output signal must be connected to a Serial DAC.

How to Set Up Process Variable Retransmit

1. Configure all of the setup parameters for the primary loop (the loop whose input signal will be retransmitted).

2. Choose an unused control output to retransmit the input signal. This output may be on the primary loop or on a different loop.

3. On the secondary loop (the loop whose output will retransmit the signal):

• Set up the parameters in the PV retrans menu. See

Process Variable Retransmit Menu on page 148.

• Enable the loop’s output and configure it to meet the requirements of the application.

4. If the signal is being retransmitted to another controller, configure the input of that controller to accept the linear output signal produced by the retransmit output.

Process Variable Retransmit Example: Data Logging

The D8 controls the temperature of a furnace. The thermocouple in one of the zones is connected to the controller and is used for closed-loop PID control. An analog recorder data logging system is also in place, and a recording of the process temperature is required. The recorder requires a linear 4 to 20 mA input signal, which represents a process variable range of

0 to 1000° F.

98 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Furnace

Heater

Loop 1

Input

Process

Variable

D8

Loop 1 PID Output

Loop 2 PID Output

Serial

DAC

Power

Controller

To Data

Logger

Figure 4.8

Application Using Process

Variable Retransmit

Table 4.8 shows the parameter setup for this example.

Table 4.8

Parameters Settings for Process

Variable Retransmit Example

Menu Parameter Value Comment

PV retrans

PV retrans

Ht retrans

LowPV

PV retrans

Ht retrans

HighPV

PV retrans

Ht output retrans

Cl output retrans

PV 1

0ËšF

1000ËšF none

Choose to retransmit the loop 1 process variable.

This is the input value represented by a 0 percent output signal. The recorder input is a linear 4 to 20 mA signal representing a range of 0° F to 1000° F, so we will use a 0 percent output signal to represent

0° F.

This is the input value represented by a 100 percent output signal. The recorder input is a linear 4 to 20 mA signal representing a range of 0° F to 1000° F, so we will use a 100 percent output signal to represent 1000° F.

Not using the cool output of loop 2 to retransmit a process variable.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 99

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

To complete this configuration, the output for loop 2 must be configured to provide the 4 to 20 mA analog signal (via the

Serial DAC) that is required by the data logger.

When setup is completed, the controller will produce an output on loop 2 which is linear and proportional to the loop 1 process variable.

Setting Up Cascade Control

Cascade control is used to control thermal systems with long lag times, which cannot be as accurately controlled with a single control loop. The output of the first (primary) loop is used to adjust the set point of the second (secondary) loop. The secondary loop normally executes the actual control.

Some applications, such as aluminum casting, use two-zone cascade control where the primary output is used for the primary heat control and the cascaded output is used for boost heat. You can use the primary heat output for both control and for determining the set point of the secondary loop.

How the Secondary Set Point is Determined

The set point of the secondary loop is determined according to the heat and cool output values from the primary loop and user-specified cascade parameters:

• If the primary loop has both heat and cool outputs, then the set point of the secondary loop is equal to the Cas- cade low SP

parameter when the cool output is at 100 percent, and is equal to the Cascade high SP when the

heat output is at 100 percent. See Figure 4.9.

• If the primary loop has only a heat output, then the set point of the secondary loop is equal to the Cascade low

SP

parameter when the heat output is at 0 percent, and is equal to the Cascade high SP parameter when the heat

output is at 100 percent. See Figure 4.10.

• If the primary loop has only a cool output, then the set point of the secondary loop is equal to the Cascade low

SP

parameter when the cool output is at 100 percent, and is equal to the Cascade high SP parameter when the cool output is at 0 percent.

100 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

High Set Point

Low Set Point

-100% 100%

Output of Primary Loop (Percent of Full Scale)

Figure 4.9

Secondary Set Point When Primary

Loop Has Heat and Cool Outputs

High Set Point

Low Set Point

0% 100%

Output of Primary Loop (Percent of Full Scale)

Figure 4.10 Secondary Set Point When Primary

Loop Has Heat Output Only

Proportional-Only Control on the Primary Loop

The PID parameters of the primary loop must be tuned to produce the desired effect on the set point of the secondary loop.

The primary loop typically uses proportional-only control.

Disabling the integral and derivative components of PID makes the secondary set point a predictable function of the primary loop’s process variable.

The proportional band is selected so that the set point of the secondary loop has the desired relationship to the process

variable of the primary loop. For an example, see Cascade

Control Example: Water Tank on page 102.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 101

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

How To Set Up Cascade Control

1. For the primary cascade loop:

• Configure proportional-only control. For an exam-

ple, see Cascade Control Example: Water Tank on page 102.

Enter the desired set point. See Changing the Set

Point on page 84.

2. For the secondary cascade loop:

• Set up PID control as you would for a standard closed-loop application.

• Set up the parameters in the Cascade menu. See

Cascade Menu on page 149.

NOTE!

Cascade control cannot be used on the same control loop as ratio control.

Cascade Control Example: Water Tank

A tank of water has an inner and outer thermocouple. The outer thermocouple is located in the center of the water. The inner thermocouple is located near the heating element. The desired temperature of the water is 150° F, which is measured at the outer thermocouple.

Using cascade control, the outer thermocouple is used on the primary loop (in this example, loop 1), and the inner thermocouple is used on the secondary loop (loop 2). The heater is controlled by loop 2.

As the temperature of the outer thermocouple drops from 150°

F to 140° F, the set point of the secondary loop should rise from 150 to 190° F.

Table 4.9 and Table 4.10 show the setup for this application.

102 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Water

Outer T/C

Loop 1 Input

Process Variable

Loop 1: Primary Cascade Loop

Loop 2: Secondary Cascade Loop

Loop 2 PID Output

Loop 2 Input

Process Variable D8

Heater

Inner T/C

Power

Controller

Figure 4.11 Example Application Using

Cascade Control

Menu

(none)

Control

Control

Control

Menu

Cascade

Cascade

Cascade

Table 4.9

Parameter Settings for the Primary

Loop in the Cascade Example

Parameter Value Comment

Set point

Ht prop band

Ht integral

Ht derivative

150ËšF

Desired temperature at the inner thermocouple.

10

0

0

As the input drops 10° F, the output increases to

100 percent.

Only proportional control is used.

Only proportional control is used.

Table 4.10

Parameter Settings for the Secondary Loop in the Cascade Example

Parameter Value Comment

Cascade prim loop

Cascade low SP

Cascade high SP

1

150ËšF

190ËšF

Loop 1 is the primary loop.

When the primary loop’s output is 0 percent, the secondary loop’s set point is 150° F.

When the primary loop output is 100 percent, the secondary channel set point is 190° F.

As the temperature in the middle of the tank (loop 1) drops, the output goes up proportionally and the set point of loop 2 goes up proportionally. Thus heat is added to the system at the element even though the temperature near the element may have been at the desired temperature.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 103

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

With proportional control, when loop 1 is at set point, its output is 0 percent, and the set point of loop 2 is equal to the desired temperature 150º F. If the temperature of the loop 1 drops below 149º F, the deviation results in a proportional output of 10 percent. This results in an increase to the set point for loop 2 equal to 10 percent of the set point range. In this case the range is 40º F (190º F - 150º F = 40º F), and 10 percent of 40º F is 4º F.

So when the temperature at loop 1 drops 1º F, the set point of loop 2 increases by 4º F until the output of loop 1 is 100 percent and the set point of loop 2 is 190º F. At this point, further decreases of the loop 1 process variable have no additional af-

fect on loop 2. Figure 4.12 illustrates this relationship.

190º F

170º F

150º F

0%

50%

Heat Output of Primary Loop

(Percent of Full Scale)

100%

150º F 145º F 140º F

Process Variable of Primary Loop (ºF)

Figure 4.12 Relationship of Secondary Loop

Set Point to Primary Loop Process

Variable in Cascade Example

Setting Up Ratio Control

Ratio control allows the process variable of one loop (master loop), multiplied by a ratio, to be the set point of another loop

(ratio loop). You can assign any process variable to determine the set point of a ratio loop.

By adjusting the ratio control parameters, you can adjust the influence that the master loop process variable has on the set point of the ratio loop.

104 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

High SP erential

Low SP

Master PV * Control Ratio + SP Diff

SP Differential

Input Range

Low

Master Loop Process Variable

Input Range

High

SP = Set Point

PV = Process Variable

Figure 4.13 Relationship Between the Process

Variable on the Master Loop and the Set Point of the Ratio Loop

NOTE!

Ratio control cannot be used on the same control loop as cascade control.

How to Set Up Ratio Control

1. Adjust and tune the master loop for optimal performance before implementing the ratio setup.

2. For the ratio loop, set the parameters in the Ratio menu.

3. Configure both the master loop and the ratio loop for inputs, outputs, and alarms

Ratio Control Example: Diluting KOH

A chemical process requires a formula of two parts water

(H

2

O) to one part potassium hydroxide (KOH) to produce di-

2

O is 10 gallons per second (gps), so the KOH should flow at 5 gps.

Separate pipes for each chemical feed a common pipe. The flow rate of each feeder pipe is measured by a D8, with H

2

O flow measured on loop 1 and KOH flow measured on loop 2.

The outputs of loops 1 and 2 adjust motorized valves.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 105

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Water Input

Flow

Transducer

Series D8 User’s Guide

KOH Input

Loop 1 Input

Process Variable

Loop 2 Input

Process Variable

Loop 1: Water Flow Control Loop

Loop 2: KOH Flow Control Loop

D8

Loop 1 PID Output

Loop 2 PID Output

Motorized

Control

Valve 1

Motorized Control Valve 2

Mixture Output

Figure 4.14 Application Using Ratio Control

Menu

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio low SP

Ratio high SP

Control ratio

Ratio SP diff

Table 4.11

Ratio Control Settings for the Ratio

Loop (Loop 2) in the Example

Parameter Value

Ratio master loop 01

0.0

7.0

0.5

0

Comment

Loop 1 is the master loop.

The minimum ratio loop set point is 0.0 gallons per second (gps).

The maximum ratio loop set point is 7.0 gps.

The H

2

0 flow rate (10 gps) is multiplied by 0.5 to obtain the KOH flow rate (5 gps).

For this example, there is no set point differential.

Setting Up Differential Control

Differential control is a simple application of ratio control, used to control one process (ratio loop) at a differential, or offset, to another process (master loop).

106 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

How to Set Up Differential Control

Set up differential control as you would set up ratio control.

Set the Control ratio parameter to 1.0, and enter the desired set point differential (offset) at the Ratio SP diff parameter.

Differential Control Example: Thermoforming

A thermal forming application requires that the outer heaters operate at temperature 50º F hotter than the center heaters.

The center heaters use infrared (IR) sensors for temperature feedback. The outer heaters use thermocouples for feedback.

We can use differential control to control the outer heaters at a 50º F differential to the central heaters. For example, if the set point for the center heaters is 325º F, the set point of the outer heaters will be 375º F.

In this application, the center heaters will be controlled by the master loop (on loop 1), and the outer heaters will be controlled by the ratio loop (on loop 2).

To set up this application, first set up the master loop (loop 1) for PID control with a set point of 325º F. Then, for the ratio loop (loop 2), set the parameters in the Ratio menu as shown

in Table 4.12.

Table 4.12

Parameter Settings for the Ratio

Loop (Loop 2) for the Example

Menu

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Parameter Value Comment

Ratio master loop

Ratio low SP

Ratio high SP

Control ratio

Ratio SP diff

01

300.0ËšF

400.0ËšF

1.0

Loop 1 is the master loop.

The lowest allowable set point for the ratio loop. For this example, we’ll use 300.0.

The highest allowable set point for the ratio loop. For this example, we’ll use 400.0.

For differential control, always set this parameter to 1.0.

50ËšF

The set point differential, or offset.

To complete the differential control setup, loop 1 and loop 2 must be configured for inputs, outputs and alarms.

Setting Up Remote Analog Set Point

Remote analog set point allows external equipment, such as a

PLC or other control system, to change the set point of a loop.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 107

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

Typically, a voltage or current source is connected to an analog input on the controller, and this input is configured as the master loop for ratio control.

Proper scaling resistors must be installed on the input to allow it to accept the analog input signal.

How to Set Up a Remote Analog Set Point

1. For the master loop (the loop that accepts the input signal from the external device), set the parameters in the Input menu.

2. For the ratio loop (the one whose set point is controlled by the external device), set the parameters in the Ratio menu. Specify the loop that accepts the input signal as the master loop.

Remote Analog Set Point Example: Changing a Set Point with a PLC

A PLC provides a 0 to 5 Vdc signal representing 0 to 300° F as a remote set point input to the D8. The input signal is received on loop 1, and control is performed on loop 2. The D8 is equipped with the proper scaling resistors to allow it to accept a 0 to 5 Vdc input.

Table 4.13 and Table 4.14 show the parameter settings for this

application.

Table 4.13

Parameters Settings for the Master

Loop (Loop 1) in the Example

Menu Parameter Value Comment

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input

Input type

Input range high

Input high signal

Input range low

Input low signal process

A 0 to 5 Vdc input signal is a process input.

300ËšF

100.0%

0ËšF

0.0%

The 5 Vdc input signal represents 300° F.

The controller is equipped with a 0 to 5 Vdc input, and the input signal is 0 to 5 Vdc, so the signal covers the full scale of 0 to 100 percent.

The 0 Vdc input signal represents 0° F.

The controller is equipped with a 0 to 5 Vdc input, and the input signal is 0 to 5 Vdc, so the signal covers the full scale of 0 to 100 percent.

108 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 4: Operation and Setup

Menu

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Ratio

Parameter

Ratio master loop

Ratio low SP

Ratio high SP

Control ratio

Ratio SP diff

Table 4.14

Parameter Settings for the Ratio

Loop (Loop 2) in the Example

Value Comment

01

0ËšF

300ËšF

1.0

Loop 1 is the master loop (receives the input signal from the external device).

For this example, we will assume that the process can be set safely over the entire range of

0 to 300° F. If desired, we could set a more restrictive range for the ratio loop.

For this example, we want to retain the original input value, so we will multiply it times 1.0.

0

For this example, we want to retain the original value, so we will add 0.

To complete the setup, loop 2 must be configured for inputs, outputs, and alarms. In addition, loop 1 may be configured for outputs and alarms.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 109

Chapter 4: Operation and Setup Series D8 User’s Guide

110 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

5

Tuning and Control

This chapter describes the different methods of control available with the D8. This chapter covers control algorithms, control methods, PID control, starting PID values and tuning instructions to help appropriately set control parameters in the

D8 system.

For more information about PID control, consult the Watlow

Anafaze Practical Guide to PID

.

Control Algorithms

This section explains the algorithms available for controlling a loop.

The control algorithm dictates how the controller responds to an input signal. Do not confuse control algorithms with control output signals (for example, analog or pulsed dc voltage).

There are several control algorithms available:

• On/off

• Proportional (P)

• Proportional and integral (PI)

• Proportional with derivative (PD)

• Proportional with integral and derivative (PID)

P, PI or PID control is necessary when process variable cycling is unacceptable or if the load or set point varies.

NOTE!

For any of these control algorithms to function, the loop must be in automatic mode.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 111

Chapter 5: Tuning and Control

On/Off Control

Series D8 User’s Guide

Process

Variable

On/off control is the simplest way to control a process. The controller turns an output on or off when the process variable reaches limits around the desired set point. This limit is adjustable.

For example, if the set point is 1000° F and the control hysteresis is 20° F, the heat output switches on when the process variable drops below 980° F and off when the process rises above 1000° F. A process using on/off control cycles around

the set point. Figure 5.1 illustrates this example.

Heat Off Heat Off

On Output

Heat On

Set Point

1000

°

F

Set Point - Hysteresis

980

°

F

Off

Figure 5.1

On/Off Control

Proportional Control (P)

Proportional control eliminates cycling by increasing or decreasing the output proportionally with the process variable’s deviation from the set point.

The magnitude of proportional response is defined by the proportional band. Outside this band, the output is either 100 percent or 0 percent. Within the proportional band the output power is proportional to the process variable’s deviation from the set point.

For example, if the set point is 1000° F and the proportional band is 20° F, the output power is as follows:

• 0 percent when the process variable is 1000° F or above

• 50 percent when the process variable is 990° F

• 75 percent when the process variable is 985° F

• 100 percent when the process variable is 980° F or below

However, a process that uses only proportional control settles at a point above or below the set point; it never reaches the set point. This behavior is known as offset or droop. When using proportional control, configure the manual reset parameter for the power level required to maintain set point.

112 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 5: Tuning and Control

Set Point

Proportional

Band

Process Variable

Figure 5.2

Proportional Control

Offset

Proportional and Integral Control (PI)

With proportional and integral control, the integral term corrects for offset by repeating the proportional band’s error correction until there is no error. For example, if a process tends to settle about 5° F below the set point, appropriate integral control brings it to the desired setting by gradually increasing the output until there is no deviation.

Set Point

Overshoot

Proportional

Band

Process Variable

Figure 5.3

Proportional and Integral Control

Proportional and integral action working together can bring a process to set point and stabilize it. However, with some processes the user may be faced with choosing between parameters that make the process very slow to reach set point and parameters that make the controller respond quickly, but introduce some transient oscillations when the set point or load changes. The extent to which these oscillations cause the process variable to exceed the set point is called overshoot.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 113

Chapter 5: Tuning and Control Series D8 User’s Guide

Proportional, Integral and Derivative Control (PID)

Derivative control corrects for overshoot by anticipating the behavior of the process variable and adjusting the output appropriately. For example, if the process variable is rapidly approaching the set point from below, derivative control reduces the output, anticipating that the process variable will reach set point. Use derivative control to reduce the overshoot and oscillation of the process variable that is common to PI control.

Figure 5.4 shows a process under full PID control.

Set Point

Proportional

Band

Process Variable

Figure 5.4

Proportional, Integral and Derivative Control

Heat and Cool Outputs

Each loop may have one or two outputs. Often a heater is controlled according to the feedback from a thermocouple, in which case only one output is needed.

In other applications, two outputs may be used for control according to one input. For example, a system with a heater and a proportional valve that controls cooling water flow can be controlled according to feedback from one thermocouple.

In such systems, the control algorithm avoids switching too frequently between heat and cool outputs. The on/off algorithm uses the control hysteresis parameter to prevent such os-

cillations (see Hysteresis on page 138). When PID control is

used for one or both loop outputs, both the hysteresis parameter and PID parameters determine when control switches between heating and cooling.

114 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 5: Tuning and Control

Setting Up and Tuning PID Loops

After installing your control system, tune each control loop and then set the loop to automatic control. When tuning a loop, choose PID parameters that will best control the process.

This section gives PID values for a variety of heating and cooling applications.

NOTE!

Tuning is a slow process. After adjusting a loop, allow about 20 minutes for the change to take effect.

Proportional Band Settings

Table 5.1 shows proportional band settings for various tem-

peratures in degrees Fahrenheit or Celsius.

Table 5.1

Proportional Band Settings

Temperature

Set Point

PB

Temperature

Set Point

PB

Temperature

Set Point

PB

-100 to 99

100 to 199

200 to 299

300 to 399

400 to 499

500 to 599

600 to 699

700 to 799

800 to 899

900 to 999

60

65

1000 to 1099 70

40

45

50

55

20

20

30

35

1100 to 1199 75

1200 to 1299 80

1300 to 1399 85

1400 to 1499 90

1500 to 1599 95

1600 to 1699 100

1700 to 1799 105

1800 to 1899 110

1900 to 1999 120

2000 to 2099 125

2100 to 2199 130

2200 to 2299 135

2300 to 2399 140

2400 to 2499 145

2500 to 2599 150

2600 to 2699 155

2700 to 2799 160

2800 to 2899 165

2900 to 2999 170

3000 to 3099 175

3100 to 3199 180

3200 to 3299 185

As a general rule, set the proportional band to ten percent of the set point below 1000 above 1000

°

°

and five percent of the set point

. This setting is useful as a starting value.

Integral Settings

The controller’s integral parameter is set in seconds per repeat. Some other products use an integral term called reset, in

units of repeats per minute. Table 5.2 shows integral settings

versus reset settings.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 115

Chapter 5: Tuning and Control Series D8 User’s Guide

Integral

(Seconds/Repeat)

30

45

60

90

120

150

180

Table 5.2

Integral Term and Reset Settings

Reset

(Repeats/Minute)

Integral

(Seconds/Repeat)

Reset

(Repeats/Minute)

2.0

1.3

1.0

0.66

0.50

0.40

0.33

210

240

270

300

400

500

600

0.28

0.25

0.22

0.20

0.15

0.12

0.10

As a general rule, use 60, 120, 180 or 240 as a starting value for the integral.

Derivative Settings

The controller’s derivative parameter is programmed in seconds. Some other products use a derivative term called rate programmed in minutes. Use the table or the formula to con-

vert parameters from one form to the other. Table 5.3 shows

derivative versus rate. Rate = Derivative/60.

Table 5.3

Derivative Term Versus Rate

Derivative

(seconds)

Rate

(minutes)

Derivative

(seconds)

Rate

(minutes)

5

10

15

20

25

30

0.08

0.16

0.25

0.33

0.41

0.50

35

40

45

50

55

60

0.58

0.66

0.75

0.83

0.91

1.0

As a general rule, set the derivative to 15 percent of integral as a starting value.

NOTE!

While the basic PID algorithm is well defined and widely recognized, various controllers implement it differently. Parameters may not be taken from one controller and applied to another with optimum results even if the above unit conversions are performed.

116 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 5: Tuning and Control

General PID Constants by Application

This section gives PID values for many applications. They are useful as control values or as starting points for PID tuning.

Proportional Band Only (P)

Set the proportional band to seven percent of the set point.

(Example: Set point = 450, proportional band = 31).

Proportional with Integral (PI)

• Set the proportional band to ten percent of set point.

(Example: Set point = 450, proportional band = 45).

• Set integral to 60.

• Set derivative off.

• Set the output filter to 2.

Proportional and Integral with Derivative (PID)

• Set the proportional band to ten percent of the set point.

(Example: Set point = 450, proportional band = 45).

• Set the integral to 60.

• Set the derivative to 15 percent of the integral.

(Example: Integral = 60, derivative = 9).

• Set the output filter to 2.

Table 5.4 shows general PID constants by application.

Application

Electrical heat with solid state relays

Electrical heat with electromechanical relays

Cool with solenoid valve

Cool with fans

Electric heat with open heat coils

Gas heat with motorized valves

Set Point>1200

Table 5.4

General PID Constants

Proportional

Band

Integral Derivative Filter

Output

Type

Cycle

Time

50

50

70

°

10

°

30

60

100

°

°

°

°

°

60

60

500

Off

20

120

240

15

15

90

10

Off

25

40

4

6

4

4

4

8

DZC

TP

TP

TP

DZC

Analog

10

10

-

-

-

20

Action

Reverse

Reverse

Direct

Direct

Reverse

Reverse

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 117

Chapter 5: Tuning and Control

Control Outputs

Series D8 User’s Guide

The controller provides open collector outputs for control.

These outputs normally control the process using solid state relays.

Open collector outputs can be configured to drive a serial digital-to-analog converter (Serial DAC) which, in turn, can provide 0 to 5 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mA control signals to operate field output devices.

Output Control Signals

On/Off

Time Proportioning (TP)

The following sections explain the different control output signals available.

When on/off control is used, the output is on or off depending on the difference between the set point and the process variable. PID algorithms are not used with on/off control. The output variable is always off or on (0 or 100 percent).

With time proportioning outputs, the PID algorithm calculates an output between 0 and 100 percent, which is represented by turning on an output for that percent of a fixed, user-selected time base or cycle time.

The cycle time is the time over which the output is proportioned, and it can be any value from 1 to 255 seconds. For example, if the output is 30 percent and the cycle time is ten seconds, then the output will be on for three seconds and off

for seven seconds. Figure 5.5 shows examples of time propor-

tioning and distributed zero crossing (DZC) waveforms.

Distributed Zero

Crossing (33%)

On

Time Proportioning (30%)

Off

0 3

Seconds

(Cycle Time = 10)

10 0 1 3 4

AC Cycle

6

Figure 5.5

Time Proportioning and Distributed Zero Crossing Waveforms

118 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 5: Tuning and Control

Distributed Zero Crossing (DZC)

With DZC outputs, the PID algorithm calculates an output between 0 and 100 percent, but the output is distributed on a variable time base. For each ac line cycle, the controller decides whether the power should be on or off. There is no fixed cycle time since the decision is made for each line cycle.

When used in conjunction with a zero crossing device, such as a solid state relay (SSR), switching is done only at the zero crossing of the ac line, which helps reduce electrical noise.

Using a DZC output should extend the life of heaters. Since the time period for 60 Hz power is 16.6 ms, the switching interval is very short and the power is applied uniformly. DZC should be used with SSRs. Do not use DZC output for electromechanical relays.

The combination of DZC output and a solid state relay can inexpensively approach the effect of analog, phase-angle fired control. Note, however, DZC switching does not limit the current and voltage applied to the heater as phase-angle firing does.

Three-Phase Distributed Zero Crossing (3P DZC)

This output type performs exactly the same as DZC except that the minimum switching time is three ac line cycles. This may be advantageous in some applications using three-phase heaters and three-phase power switching.

Analog Outputs

For analog outputs, the PID algorithm calculates an output between 0 and 100 percent. This percentage of the analog output range can be applied to an output device via a Dual DAC or a

Serial DAC.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 119

Chapter 5: Tuning and Control Series D8 User’s Guide

Output Filter

The output filter digitally smooths PID control output signals.

It has a range of 0 to 255 scans, which gives a time constant of 0 to 85 seconds for a CPC408 or 0 to 43 seconds for a

CPC404. Use the output filter if you need to filter out erratic output swings due to extremely sensitive input signals, like a turbine flow signal or an open air thermocouple in a dry air gas oven.

The output filter can also enhance PID control. Some processes are very sensitive and would otherwise require a large proportional band, making normal control methods ineffective.

Using the output filter allows a smaller proportional band to be used, achieving better control.

Also, use the filter to reduce the process output swings and output noise when a large derivative is necessary, or to make badly tuned PID loops and poorly designed processes behave properly.

Reverse and Direct Action

With reverse action an increase in the process variable causes a decrease in the output. Conversely, with direct action an increase in the process variable causes an increase in the output.

Heating applications normally use reverse action and cooling applications usually use direct action.

120 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

6

Menu and Parameter Reference

The D8 has operator and setup parameters that let you change the configuration of the controller. This section contains the following information for each operator and setup parameter:

• Description

• Values

• Default value

• Information for addressing controller parameters via

DeviceNet.

For information about how to access the operator and setup

parameters, see the Operation and Setup chapter.

Operator Parameters

Use the operator parameters to change the set point, control mode or output power level.

.

><

, p x

Access the operator parameters (from the loop display).

Save a value and go to the next parameter.

Edit parameter values.

Save a value and go to the previous parameter.

Save a value and go to the next or previous loop.

Cancel a change without saving.

Escape to the loop display.

Figure 6.1

Operator Parameter Navigation

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 121

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Set Point l01 Set point r

b 25 ËšC

Enter the desired value for the process variable. The new set point will take effect immediately when you save the new value. The Set point parameter is not available if ratio control or cascade control is enabled for the loop.

Values:

For thermocouples and RTD inputs, same as the input

range (see Table 6.7 ). For process and pulse inputs, any value

between the Input range low and Input range high parameters in the Input menu.

Default:

25

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object

: Assembly (04 hex), Input (64 hex)

Mode l01 Mode r

bmanual

Display

Value manual auto tune

Off

DeviceNet

Value

0

1

2

3

Heat/Cool Output l01 Heat outputr

b 0%

Choose the control mode for this loop.

Values:

See Table 6.1

Default:

off (3)

DeviceNet Object

: Assembly (04 hex), Control (66 hex)

Table 6.1

Control Modes

Description

The operator manually sets the output power for the loop.

The controller automatically controls the outputs according to the controller configuration.

The controller calculates PID parameters for the loop. After tuning, the controller switches to automatic mode.

Outputs are at 0%

Choose the manual output power level for this loop. This parameter is available only for the manual control mode.

Values:

0 to 100% (0 to 1000). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

0% (0)

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Percentage Values on page 60.

DeviceNet Object

: Assembly (04 hex), Output (65 hex)

122 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Process Variable

01 925 ËšF 0

1000man 100

Indicates the value measured by the sensor after filtering and scaling. This parameter is read-only.

Values:

For thermocouples and RTD inputs, same as the input

range (see Table 6.7 on page 131). For process and pulse in-

puts, any value between the Input range low and Input range high

parameters in the Input menu.

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Assembly (04 hex), Input (64 hex)

Overview of the Setup Menus

The D8 has nine setup menus. Table 6.2 provides a brief de-

scription of each menu. Figure 6.2 lists all of the menus and

parameters in the same order that they appear in the controller.

Table 6.2

D8 Setup Menus

Menu

Global setup

Input

Control

Output

Alarms

PV retrans

Cascade

Ratio

I/O test

Description

Configure global settings, which affect all loops.

Configure the input for each loop.

Configure PID control for each loop.

Configure heat and cool outputs for each loop.

Configure alarms for each loop.

Configure process variable retransmit.

Configure cascade control.

Configure ratio control.

Perform tests of the digital inputs, digital outputs and keypad.

Page

Number

143

148

149

150

151

125

131

136

139

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 123

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Global setup

Load setup from job

Save setup as job

BCD job load

BCD job load logic

Mode override

Mode override D/I active

Power up alarm delay

Power up loop mode

Keypad lock

TC short alarm

AC line freq

D/O alarm polarity

MAC ID

Baud rate

Module LED

Network LED

Bus off count

WATLOW D8x Vx.xx cs=xxxx

Input

Input type

Loop name

Input units

Input pulse sample

Calibration offset

Reversed T/C detect

Disp format

Input range high

Input high signal

Input range low

Input low signal

Input filter

Control

Heat prop band

Heat integral

Heat derivative

Heat manual reset

Heat filter

Cool prop band

Cool integral

Cool derivative

Cool manual reset

Cool filter

Hysteresis

RestoreAuto

Navigation for the Setup Menus x

><

,.

Alarms

Access the setup menus (press and hold for 3 seconds)

Cancel a change without saving.

Escape from a parameter to a menu.

Escape from a menu to the loop display.

Go to the next or previous menu.

Edit a parameter value.

Save a value and go to the next or previous parameter.

p

Save a value and go to the next or previous loop.

Output

Heat output type

Heat cycle time

Heat SDAC signal

Ht SDAC low signal

Ht SDAC hi signal

Heat action

Heat power limit

HtPwr limit time

Sensor fail heat output

Open T/C ht out average

Heat output curve

Cool output type

Cool cycle time

Cool SDAC signal

Cl SDAC low signal

Cl SDAC hi signal

Cool action

Cool power limit

ClPwr limit time

Sensor fail cool output

Open T/C cl out average

Cool output curve

Alarm high SP

Alarm high func

Alarm high output

HiDeviation value

HiDeviation func

HiDeviation output

LoDeviation value

LoDeviation func

LoDeviation output

Alarm low SP

Alarm low func

Alarm low output

Alarm hysteresis

Alarm delay

PV retrans

Heat output retrans PV

Ht retrans LowPV

Ht retrans HighPV

Cool output retrans PV

Cl retrans LowPV

Cl retrans HighPV

Cascade

Cascade prim loop

Cascade low SP

Cascade hi SP

Ratio

Ratio master loop

Ratio low SP

Ratio high SP

Control ratio

Ratio SP diff

I/O tests

Digital inputs

Keypad test

Display test

Test D/O 1

...

Test D/O 20

124

Figure 6.2

Setup Menus and Parameters

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Global Setup Menu

lGlobal setup r

Other menus b

Use the Global setup menu to set parameters that affect all loops.

Load Setup From Job lLoad setup r from job bnone

Load one of the jobs stored in battery-backed RAM. The following parameters are loaded for each loop as part of a job:

• PID constants, filter settings, set points and hysteresis.

• Control mode (automatic or manual) and output power levels (if the loop is in manual control)

• Alarm functions, set points, hysteresis and delay settings.

If you have enabled remote job selection (see BCD Job Load on page 126), you will see the message below, and you will

not be able to use the controller keypad to load a job.

lLoad setup r not available

Save Setup As Job lSave setup as r job bnone

NOTE!

Current settings are overwritten when you select a job from memory. Save your current settings to another job number if you want to keep them.

Values:

1 to 8 (1 to 8) or none (0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object

: Global (6B hex)

Save the current settings as one of eight jobs in the batterybacked RAM. The following parameters are saved for each loop as part of a job:

• PID constants, filter settings, set points and hysteresis.

• Control mode (automatic, tune, off or manual) and output power levels (if the loop is in manual control)

• Alarm functions, set points, hysteresis and delay settings.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 125

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

If you have enabled remote job selection (see BCD Job Load on page 126), you will see the message below, and you will

not be able to use the controller keypad to save a job.

lSave setup as r not available

Values:

1 to 8 (1 to 8) or none (0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

BCD Job Load lBCD job load r

bdisabled

Choose the digital input(s) to use for remote job selection. The controller uses the states of the selected inputs as a binary

code that specifies which job number to run (see Table 6.3).

To save jobs into memory, use the Save setup as job parameter.

Values:

See Table 6.3

Default:

disabled (0)

DeviceNet Object

: Global (6B hex)

Table 6.3

Values for BCD Job Load

Display

Value use D/I 1 use D/I 1-2 use D/I 1-3 disabled

DeviceNet

Value

1

2

3

0

Description

Use digital input 1 for remote selection of jobs 1 and 2.

Use digital inputs 1 and 2 for remote selection of jobs 1 to 4.

Use digital inputs 1 to 3 for remote selection of jobs 1 to 8.

Disable remote job selection

BCD Job Load Logic lBCD job load r logic b1=true

Choose which state is considered “true” for the digital inputs that are used for remote job selection.

• If 1=true is selected, then an input is true if connected to controller common, and false for an open circuit.

• If 0=true is selected, then an input is true for an open circuit, and false if connected to controller common.

Table 6.4 shows which combinations of input states are re-

quired to load each job.

126 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Mode Override lMode override r bdisabled

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Values:

1=true (0) or 0=true (1). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

1=true (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

Table 6.4

Digital Input States Required to

Load Each Job

Job

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

1

F

T

F

T

F

T

F

T

Digital Input

2

T

T

F

F

T

T

F

F

3

T

T

T

T

F

F

F

F

Choose the digital input to use for the mode override feature.

When the input is activated, the controller sets all loops to manual mode at the output levels specified at the Sensor fail heat output

and Sensor fail cool output parameters in the Out- put

menu.

Use the Mode override D/I active parameter to choose which signal state activates the mode override feature.

Values:

enabled by D/I1 to enabled by D/I8 (1 to 8) or dis- abled

(0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

disabled (0)

DeviceNet Object

: Global (6B hex)

WARNING!

Do not rely solely on the mode override feature to shut down your process. Install external safety devices or overtemperature devices for emergency shutdowns.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 127

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Mode Override Digital Input Active lMode override r

D/I active bon

Choose whether the on state (connected to controller common) or off state (open circuit) activates the mode override feature.

Use the Mode override parameter to enable the mode override feature and select the digital input.

Values:

on (0) or off (1). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

on (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

Power Up Alarm Delay lPower up alarmr delay b 0 min

Specify how long to delay high, low and deviation alarms on all loops during powerup. This feature does not delay failed sensor alarms.

Values:

0 to 60 minutes

Default:

0

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

Power Up Loop Mode lPower up loop r modebmanual 0%

Choose the power-up state of the control outputs.

Values:

See Table 6.5 on page 128.

Default:

off (0)

DeviceNet Object

: Global (6B hex)

Display

Value off from memory

WARNING!

Do not set the controller to start from memory if it might be unsafe for the control outputs to be on upon power up.

Table 6.5

Power Up Loop Modes

DeviceNet

Value

Description

0

1

Upon powerup, all loops are set to manual mode at 0 percent output.

Upon powerup, all loops are restored to the previous control mode and output power level.

128 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Keypad Lock lKeypad lock r

boff

Thermocouple Short Alarm lTC short alarmr bdisabled

Choose a digital input to enable for thermocouple short detection. Install a device that connects the input to controller common when the process power is on. A thermocouple short is detected if the process power is on but the temperature does not rise as expected.

If a thermocouple short is detected, the controller puts the loop in manual mode at the output power level specified by the

Sensor fail heat

output or Sensor fail cool output parameter in the Output menu.

Values:

enabled by D/I1 to enabled by D/I8 (1 to 8) or dis- abled

(0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

disabled (0)

DeviceNet Object

: Global (6B hex)

AC Line Frequency

Set this parameter to on to disable the . key on the keypad.

This restricts access to the operator parameters from the controller keypad.

Values:

on (1) or off (0). Values in parentheses are for communications, and are stored as the second bit of the system command word, so set or read only that bit.

Default:

off (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

lAC line freq r

b60 Hz

Specify the ac line frequency. The controller uses this information for correct timing of distributed zero-crossing (DZC) output signals and for optimum filtering of analog inputs.

If you edit this parameter, you must switch power to the controller off, then back on, in order for the change take effect.

Values:

50 (1) or 60 (0) Hz. Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

60 Hz (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

Digital Output Alarm Polarity lD/O alarm r polarity bon

Choose the polarity of all digital outputs used for alarms.

This setting does not apply to the global alarm output or the

CPU watchdog output.

Values:

See Table 6.6.

Default:

on (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 129

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 6.6

Digital Output Alarm Polarity

Display Value DeviceNet Value on off

0

1

Description

Digital alarm outputs sink current to analog common when an alarm occurs.

Digital alarm outputs stop sinking current to analog common when an alarm occurs.

MAC ID lMAC ID r

b63

The node address for the controller. This value is set with the

Address rotary switches. See Connecting the D8 to a DeviceNet Network on page 40.

Values

: 00 to 63

DeviceNet Object

: DeviceNet (03 hex)

Baud Rate lBaud rate r

b500

Indicates the baud rate for communications. This value is set

with the Data Rate rotary switch. See Connecting the D8 to a

DeviceNet Network on page 40.

Values

: 125, 250, 500K

DeviceNet Object

: DeviceNet (03 hex)

Module LED l<Module LED r

green

Indicates the status of the Module LED

Values

: off, green, red, flashing red, flashing green ( see Module Status Indicator Light on page 44).

DeviceNet Object

: N/A

Network LED lNetwork LED r

green

Indicates the status of the Network LED

Values:

off, flashing green, green, flashing red, red, (see Network Status Indicator Light on page 44).

DeviceNet Object:

N/A

Bus Off Count

130

lBus off count r

0

Indicates the number of times the controller has gone to the bus-off state.

Values

: 0 (indicates the controller has not had a bus off error since the last power cycle) or 1 (indicates the controller has gone bus off since the last power cycle)

DeviceNet Object

: DeviceNet (03 hex)

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Model and Firmware Version lWATLOW D84 r

V1.00 cs=1234

The last parameter in the Global setup menu shows the controller model (WATLOW D84 or WATLOW D88), the firmware version (Vxx.xx), and the flash-memory checksum

(CS=xxxx).

DeviceNet Objects

: Model: Identity (01 hex), Firmware Version: N/A, Checksum: N/A.

Input Menu

l01 Input r

Other menus b

Use the Input menu to configure the process input:

• Input type

• Engineering units

• Scaling, calibration and filtering.

Input Type l01 Input type r

bJ T/C

Choose the type of sensor that is connected to the analog input.

Values:

See Table 6.7.

Default:

J thermocouple (1)

DeviceNet Object

: Input (64 hex)

Table 6.7

Input Types and Ranges

J t/c

K t/c

T t/c

S v

R t/c

B t/c

E t/c

RTD

Display

Value process skip

DeviceNet

Value

20

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

0

10

Description Input Range

Type J thermocouple

Type K thermocouple

Type T thermocouple

Type S thermocouple

Type R thermocouple

Type B thermocouple

Type E thermocouple

RTD

Voltage or current signal, depending upon the hardware

configuration. See Figure 1.2 on page 6.

Loop is not used for control, does not report alarms, and is not shown on the scanning display.

-350 to 1400°F (-212 to 760°C)

-450 to 2500° F (-268 to 1371°C)

-450 to 750°F (-268 to 399°C)

0 to 3200°F (-18 to 1760°C)

0 to 3210°F (-18 to 1766°C)

150 to 3200°F (66 to 1760°C)

-328 to 1448°F (-200 to 787°C)

-328.0 to 1150.0°F (-200.0 to 621.1°C)

User defined. See Setting Up Process Variable Retransmit on page

97.

(none)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 131

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Loop Name l01 Loop name r

b01

Series D8 User’s Guide

Enter a two-character name for the loop. This name is shown on the controller display in place of the loop number.

Values:

See Table 6.8.

Default:

The loop number (01, 02, 03, and so on.)

DeviceNet Object

: Input (64 hex)

Table 6.8

Characters for the Loop Name and

Input Units Parameters

Character

A to Z

0 to 9

Degree symbol

Percent sign

Forward slash

Space

Pound sign

Display Values ASCII Values

A to Z

0 to 9

Ëš

%

/

.

#

65 to 90

48 to 57

223

37

47

32

35

Input Units l01 Input unitsr

b ËšF

For a thermocouple or RTD input, choose the temperature scale. For a process input, enter a three-character description of the engineering units.

Values:

For a process input, see Table 6.8. For a thermocou-

ple or RTD input, ËšF or ËšC. When setting the units for a thermocouple or RTD input through communications, you must set the first character as a space (32), the second character as the degree symbol (223) and the third character as “C” (67) or

“F” (70).

Default:

ËšC for a thermocouple or RTD input, three spaces for a process input

DeviceNet Object

: Input (64 hex)

Calibration Offset l01 Calibrationr offsetb 0 ËšF

132

For a thermocouple or RTD input, enter the offset to correct for signal inaccuracy. A positive value increases the reading and a negative value decreases it. Use an independent sensor or your own calibration equipment to find the offset for your system.

Values:

See Table 6.9

Default:

0 or 0.0

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object

: Input (64 hex)

Table 6.9

Calibration Offset Ranges

Offset Range

Type of Sensor

ËšF ËšC

RTD

J Thermocouple

K Thermocouple

T Thermocouple

-300.0 to 300.0

-300 to 300

B Thermocouple

S Thermocouple

-300 to 76

R Thermocouple -300 to 66

-300.0 to 300.0

-300 to 300

-300 to 300

-300 to 300

Reversed Thermocouple Detection l01 Reversed r

T/C detect b on

Choose whether to enable polarity checking for thermocouples. If the controller detects a reversed thermocouple, it activates an alarm and sets the loop to manual mode at the power level indicated by the Sensor fail heat output or Sensor fail cool output

parameter in the Output menu.

Values:

on (1) or off (0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

on (1)

DeviceNet Object:

Input (64 hex)

Display Format l01 Disp formatr b -999to 3000

For a process input, choose the range and the number of decimal places for the process variable and related parameters.

Choose a precision appropriate for the range and accuracy of the sensor.

Values:

See Table 6.10 on page 134

Default:

-999 to 3000 for a process input.

DeviceNet Object

: Input (64 hex)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 133

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Input Range High

Table 6.10

Display Formats

Display Value

-999 to 3000

-9999 to 30000

-999.9 to 3000.0

-99.99 to 300.00

-9.999 to 30.000

-.9999 to 3.0000

DeviceNet

Value

255

0

1

2

3

4

Minimum

Process

Variable

-999

-9999

-999.9

-99.99

-9.999

-0.9999

Maximum

Process

Variable

3000

30000

3000.0

300.00

30.000

3.0000

l01 Input ranger high b 1000 ËšF

For a process input, enter the high process variable for input scaling purposes. This value will be displayed when the input signal is at the level set for Input high signal.

This parameter and the Input high signal parameter together define a point on the conversion line for the scaling function.

See Setting Up a Process Input on page 88.

Values:

Any value between Input range low and the maximum process variable for the selected display format (see

Table 6.10).

Default:

1000. Decimal placement depends upon the value of the Disp format parameter.

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Input (64 hex)

Input High Signal l01 Input high r signal b100.0%

For a process input, enter the input signal level that corresponds to the value for the Input range high parameter. The high signal is a percentage of the full scale input range.

Values:

-99.8 to 999.9 (-998 to 9999) percent of full scale.

This value must be greater than the value for Input low signal.

Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

100.0% (1000)

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Percentage Values on page 60.

DeviceNet Object:

Input (64 hex)

134 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Input Range Low l01 Input ranger low b 0

Input Low Signal l01 Input low r signal b .0%

Input Filter l01 Input r filter b 3scans

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

For a process input, enter the low process variable for input scaling purposes. This value will be displayed when the input signal is at the level set for Input low signal.

This value and the value for Input low signal together define one of the points on the scaling function’s conversion line. See

Setting Up a Process Input on page 88.

Values:

Any value between the minimum process variable for

the selected display format (see Table 6.10 on page 134) and

the value for Input range high.

Default:

0

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet

: See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Input (64 hex)

For a process input, enter the input signal level that corresponds to the low process variable you entered for the Input range low

parameter. The low signal is a percentage of the full scale input range.

Values:

-99.9 to 999.8 (-999 to 9998) percent of full scale.

This value must be less than the value for Input high signal.

Values in parenthesis are for communications.

Default:

0

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet :

See Decimal Placement for Percentage Values on page 60.

DeviceNet Object:

Input (64 hex)

Choose the amount of filtering to apply to the process variable before the value is logged, displayed or used in the control calculation. The input filter simulates a resistor-capacitor (RC) filter. Use it to keep the process variable from varying unrealistically.

When enabled, the process variable responds to a step change by going to two-thirds of the actual value within the specified number of scans. One scan is 0.17 seconds for a four-loop controller and 0.33 seconds for a eight-loop controller.

Values:

0 (off) to 255

Default:

3

DeviceNet Object:

Input (64 hex)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 135

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Control Menu

l01 Control r

Other menus b

Use the Control menu to adjust heat and cool control parameters, including:

• Proportional band, integral and derivative

• Output filter

• Control hysteresis

The controller has separate PID and filter settings for heat and cool outputs. In this section, only the heat screens are shown, but the explanations apply to both the heat and cool parameters.

If you have not set up a Series D8 controller before, or if you

do not know which values to enter, read the Tuning and Control chapter, which contains PID tuning constants and useful

starting values.

Heat/Cool Proportional Band l01 Heat prop r band b 40 ËšF

Enter the proportional band. A larger value yields less proportional action for a given deviation from set point.

Values:

For a thermocouple or RTD input, see Table 6.11.

For a process input, 1 to the span of the input range (Input range high

- Input range low).

Default:

50 for a thermocouple, RTD or process input.

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Control (66 hex)

Table 6.11

Proportional Band Values

Type of Sensor

J Thermocouple

K Thermocouple

T Thermocouple

S Thermocouple

R Thermocouple

B Thermocouple

E Thermocouple

RTD

Values in ËšF

1 to 1750

1 to 2950

1 to 1200

1 to 3200

1 to 3210

1 to 3350

1 to 1776

0.1 to 1478.0

Values in ËšC

1 to 972

1 to 1639

1 to 667

1 to 1778

1 to 1784

1 to 1694

1 to 987

0.1 to 821.1

136 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Heat/Cool Integral l01 Heat inte- r gral b 180 sec/R

Enter the integral constant. A larger value yields less integral action.

Values:

0 (off) to 6000 seconds per repeat

Default:

For the Heat integral parameter, 180. For the Cool integral

parameter, 60.

DeviceNet Object:

Control (66 hex)

Heat/Cool Derivative l01 Heat de- r rivativeb 0 sec

Heat/Cool Manual Reset l01 Heat manualr reset b 0%

A process that uses only proportional control settles at a point above or below the set point; it never reaches the set point.

This is known as offset or droop. At this parameter, enter the power level required to maintain set point to compensate for this offset.

Values:

0 to 100% (0 to 1000). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

0% (0)

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Percentage Values on page 60.

DeviceNet Object:

Control (66 hex)

Heat/Cool Filter

Enter the derivative constant. A larger value yields greater derivative action.

Values:

0 to 255 seconds

Default:

0

DeviceNet Object:

Control (66 hex)

l01 Heat filterr

b 3 scans

Use this parameter to dampen the response of the heat or cool output. The output responds to a change by going to approximately two-thirds of its final value within the specified number of scans. A larger value results in a slower response to changes in the process variable.

Values:

0 (off) to 255

Default:

3

DeviceNet Object:

Control (66 hex)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 137

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Hysteresis l01 Hysteresis r

b 5 ËšC

Input Type

Thermocouple

RTD

Process

Display Format n/a n/a

-999 to 3000

-9999 to 30000

-999.9 to 3000.0

-99.99 to 300.00

-9.999 to 30.000

-0.9999 to 3.0000

Specify how much the process variable must deviate from set point before the output can switch between on and off (for on/ off control) or switch between heating and cooling (for heat/ cool control).

Values:

See Table 6.12 for values and decimal placement.

For communications the value is always 0 to 5000, see

Table 6.12 for implied decimal location.

Default:

See Table 6.12

DeviceNet Object:

Control (66 hex)

Table 6.12

Values for the Control Hysteresis and Deviation Alarm Parameters

Values

0 to 500

0 to 500.0

0 to 500

0 to 5000

0.0 to 500.0

0.00 to 50.00

0.000 to 5.000

0.0000 to 0.5000

Default

5

5.0

5

50

5.0

0.50

0.050

0.0050

Restore Automatic Mode l01 RestoreAutor bdisabled

Choose a digital input. If the input is connected to controller common, the loop returns to automatic control mode after a failed sensor is repaired (if it was in automatic mode when the sensor failure occurred).

Values:

enabled by D/I1 to enabled by D/I8 (1 to 8) or dis- abled

(0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

disabled (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Control (66 hex)

138 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Output Menu

l01 Output r

Other menus b

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Use the Output menu to enable and configure heat and cool outputs.

Heat/Cool Output Type l01 Heat outputr type bTP

Output Type

Display

Value

Choose the output type, or disable the heat or cool output. For more information about each output type, see the Tuning and

Control chapter. (If an output is used for process variable retransmit, the disabled option is not available. To disable the output, first disable process variable retransmit for the output.

See Heat/Cool Output Retransmit on page 148.)

Values:

See Table 6.13

Default:

TP (2) for heat, disabled (0) for cool

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Table 6.13

Heat and Cool Output Types

DeviceNet

Value

Description

Time

Proportioning

On/Off

None

Three-Phase

Distributed

Zero Crossing

Serial DAC

Distributed

Zero Crossing

TP on/off disabled

3P DZC

SDAC

DZC

2

1

0

5

4

3

The output is switched on and off once during a user-selected cycle time. Within each cycle, the duration of on versus off time is proportional to the percent output power.

The output is either full on or full off.

The output is not used for control and is available for another use, such as an alarm output.

Same as DZC, but for three-phase heaters wired in delta configuration. For grounded Y configuration, use DZC instead.

Use this option if a Serial DAC is connected to the output. If you set the output type to SDAC, the controller assigns digital output 34 as a clock line for the Serial DAC.

The output on/off state is calculated for every ac line cycle, which means that the output turns on and off multiple times per second. Use DZC with solid state output devices or a Dual DAC. Not recommended for use with electromechanical relays.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 139

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Heat/Cool Cycle Time l01 Heat cycle r

time b 10sec

For a time-proportioning output, enter the cycle time in sec-

onds. For more information about cycle time, see Time Proportioning (TP) on page 118.

Values:

1 to 255 seconds

Default:

10

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Heat/Cool SDAC Signal l01 Heat SDAC r signal bvoltage

For a Serial DAC output, choose the type of output signal that the Serial DAC will provide.

Values:

voltage (0) or current (1). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

voltage (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Heat/Cool SDAC Low Signal l01 Ht SDAC lowr signal b .00vdc

For a Serial DAC output, enter the low output signal level for the Serial DAC. The Serial DAC converts 0 percent output from the controller to this value.

Enter high and low values that match the input range of the output device. For instance, if the output device has a 0 to 10

Vdc input range, then set SDAC low signal to .00 Vdc and set

SDAC hi signal

to 10.00 Vdc.

Values:

.00 to 9.90 Vdc (0 to 990) or 0.00 to 19.90 mA

(0 to 1990). This value must be less than the value of SDAC hi signal

. Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

.00 Vdc (0) or 4.00 mA (400)

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Heat/Cool SDAC High Signal l01 Ht SDAC hi r signal b10.00vdc

For a Serial DAC output, enter the high output signal level for the Serial DAC. The Serial DAC converts 100 percent output from the controller to the value set here.

Enter the high and low values that match the input range of the output device. For instance, if the output device has a 4 to 20 mA input range, then set SDAC hi signal to 20 mA and set

SDAC low signal

to 4 mA.

Values:

0.10 to 10.00 Vdc (10 to 1000) or 0.10 to 20.00 mA

(10 to 2000) This value must be greater than the value of

SDAC low signal

. Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

10.00 Vdc (1000) or 20.00 mA (2000)

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

140 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Heat/Cool Action

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

l01 Heat actionr

breverse

Choose the control action for the output. When the action is set to reverse, the output goes up when the process variable goes down. When the action is set to direct, the output goes down when the process variable goes down. Normally, heat outputs are set to reverse action and cool outputs are set to direct action.

Values:

reverse (0) or direct (1). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

reverse (0) for heat outputs, direct (1) for cool outputs

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Heat/Cool Power Limit l01 Heat power r limit b100%

Use this parameter to limit the output power for a heat or cool output. This limit may be continuous, or it may be in effect for the number of minutes specified at the next parameter.

The power limit only affects loops in automatic mode. It does not affect loops in manual mode.

Values:

0 to 100% (0 to 1000). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

100% (1000)

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Percentage Values on page 60.

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Heat/Cool Power Limit Time l01 HtPwr limitr time bcontinuous

Enter the duration of the power limit set at the previous parameter, or choose continuous to keep the limit in effect at all times.

If you choose a timed limit, the limit timer restarts whenever the controller powers up and whenever the loop switches from manual to automatic mode.

Values:

1 to 999 minutes (1 to 999) or continuous (0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

continuous (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 141

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Sensor Fail Heat/Cool Output l01 Sensor failr heat outputb 0%

A loop will switch to manual mode at the specified output power if one of the following conditions occurs while in automatic mode:

• A failed sensor alarm occurs, or

The mode override input becomes active (see Mode

Override on page 127).

• DeviceNet connection becomes inactive unexpectedly.

For most applications, this parameter should be set to 0% for both heat and cool outputs.

Values:

0 to 100% (0 to 1000). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

0% (0)

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Percentage Values on page 60.

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

WARNING!

Do not rely solely on the failed sensor alarm to adjust the output in the event of a sensor failure. If the loop is in manual mode when a failed sensor alarm occurs, the output is not adjusted. Install independent external safety devices to shut down the system if a failure occurs.

Open Thermocouple Heat/Cool Output Average l01 Open T/C htr out average boff

If you set this parameter to on and a thermocouple open alarm occurs, a loop set to automatic control mode will switch to manual mode at the average output prior to the alarm.

Values:

on (1) or off (0). Values in parentheses are for communications.

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

142 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Heat/Cool Output Curve l01 Heat outputr curve blinear

Choose an output curve. If curve 1 or 2 is selected, a PID calculation results in a lower actual output level than the linear output requires. Use curve 1 or 2 if the system has a nonlinear response to the output device.

Values:

linear (0), curve 1 (1) or curve 2 (2). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

linear (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

100

90

80

80 79

70

66

60

60

62

40

20

10

3

20

8

2

30

Linear

40

50

Curve 1

48

36

27

29

19 19

13

4

7

12

44

Curve 2

0

Figure 6.3

Linear and Nonlinear Outputs

Alarms Menu

l01 Alarms r

Other menus

Use the Alarms menu to configure high alarms, low alarms, and deviation alarms, including:

• Alarm set points

• Alarm outputs

• Alarm behavior

• Alarm hysteresis

• Alarm delay

Alarm High Set Point l01 Alarm high r

SP b 760 ËšC

Enter the set point at which the high alarm activates. The high alarm activates if the process variable rises above this value.

For more information about the high alarm, see Alarm High and Alarm Low on page 96.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 143

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Values:

For a thermocouple or RTD input, any value within

the input range (see Table 6.7 ). For a process or pulse input,

any value between the Input range low and Input range high parameters.

Default:

760. Decimal placement depends upon the Input type

and Disp format settings.

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Alarm High Function l01 Alarm high r func boff

Choose whether the high alarm functions as an alarm or as a boost output, or disable the alarm.

Values:

See Table 6.14 on page 144.

Default:

off

DeviceNet Object:

See Alarm Acknowledge on page 153 and

Alarm Function on page 154.

Table 6.14

Alarm Functions

Value off standard boost

Description

No alarm function.

Alarm is indicated and logged.

Latching global alarm is activated.

Alarm must be acknowledged to clear.

Optional non-latching alarm output is activated.

Alarm message on controller display only.

Alarm does not require acknowledgement.

Non-latching alarm output is activated. Use the alarm set points to control this output for boost control.

Alarm High Output l01 Alarm high r outputbnone

Choose a digital output to activate when the high alarm occurs. You cannot choose an output that is in use for closedloop control or for the Serial DAC clock.

Values:

none (0) or output 1 to 18 (1 to 18). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object

: Alarm (67 hex)

144 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

High Deviation Value l01 HiDeviationr value b 5 ËšC

High Deviation Function l01 HiDeviationr func boff

Choose whether the alarm functions as an alarm or as a boost output, or disable the alarm.

Values:

See Table 6.14 on page 144.

Default:

off

DeviceNet Object:

See Alarm Enable on page 153 and Alarm

Function on page 154.

High Deviation Output

Enter the amount by which the process variable must rise above the set point for the high deviation alarm to occur. For

more information, see Deviation Alarms on page 96.

Values:

See Table 6.12 on page 138 for values and decimal

placement.

Default:

See Table 6.12 .

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

l01 HiDeviationr outputbnone

Choose a digital output to activate when the high deviation alarm occurs. You cannot choose an output that is in use for closed-loop control or for the Serial DAC clock.

Values:

none (0) or output 1 to 18 (1 to 18). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Low Deviation Value l01 LoDeviationr value b 5 ËšC

Enter the amount by which the process variable must fall below the set point for the low deviation alarm to occur. For

more information, see Process Alarms on page 95.

Values:

See Table 6.12 on page 138 for values and decimal

placement.

Default:

Table 6.12

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Low Deviation Function l01 LoDeviationr func boff

Choose whether the alarm functions as an alarm or as a boost output, or disable the alarm.

Values:

See Table 6.14 on page 144.

Default:

off

DeviceNet Object:

See Alarm Enable on page 153 and Alarm

Function on page 154.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 145

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Low Deviation Output l01 LoDeviationr outputbnone

Series D8 User’s Guide

Choose a digital output to activate when the low deviation alarm occurs. You cannot choose an output that is in use for closed-loop control or for the Serial DAC clock.

Values:

none (0) or output 1 to 18 (1 to 18). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Alarm Low Set Point l01 Alarm low r

SP b 0°C

Enter the set point at which the low alarm activates. The low alarm activates if the process variable drops below this value.

For more information, see Process Alarms on page 95.

Values:

For a thermocouple or RTD input, any value within

the input range (see Table 6.7 on page 131). For a process or

pulse input, any value between the Input range low and Input range high

parameters.

Default:

0

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Alarm Low Function l01 Alarm low r func boff

Choose whether the alarm functions as an alarm or as a boost output, or disable the alarm.

Values:

See Table 6.14 .

Default:

off

DeviceNet Object:

See Alarm Acknowledge on page 153 and

Alarm Function on page 154.

Alarm Low Output l01 Alarm low r outputbnone

Choose a digital output to activate when the low alarm occurs.

You cannot choose an output that is in use for closed-loop control or for the Serial DAC clock.

Values:

none (0) or output 1 to 18 (1 to 18). Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

146 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Alarm Hysteresis l01 Alarm hys- r teresisb 2 ËšC

Input Type

Thermocouple

RTD

Process

Display Format n/a n/a

-999 to 3000

-9999 to 30000

-999.9 to 3000.0

-99.99 to 300.00

-9.999 to 30.000

-0.9999 to 3.0000

Enter the amount by which the process variable must return within the alarm limit before a high alarm, low alarm or deviation alarm clears. Use the alarm hysteresis to prevent repeated alarms as the process variable cycles around an alarm limit.

Values:

See Table 6.15 on page 147 for values and decimal

placement. For communications the value is always 0 to 5000.

Default:

See Table 6.15.

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Table 6.15

Values for Alarm Hysteresis

Values

Values via

Communications

0 to 500

0 to 500.0

0 to 500

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0.0 to 500.0

0.00 to 50.00

0 to 5000

0 to 5000

0.000 to 5.000

0 to 5000

0.0000 to 0.5000

0 to 5000

Default

2

2.0

2

20

2.0

0.20

0.020

0.0020

Alarm Delay l01 Alarm delayr

b 0 sec

Use this parameter to delay a failed sensor or process alarm until the alarm condition has been continuously present for longer than the delay time.

To delay alarms on powerup only, see Power Up Alarm Delay on page 128.

Values:

0 to 255 seconds.

Default:

0

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 147

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Process Variable Retransmit Menu

l01 PV retrans r

Other menus b

Use the PV retrans menu to configure an output so that it will retransmit the process variable from another loop. For details,

see Setting Up Process Variable Retransmit on page 97.

This menu contains parameters for both heat and cool outputs.

The sample screens in this section show the heat parameters, but the descriptions apply to both the heat and cool parameters.

Heat/Cool Output Retransmit l01 Heat outputr retrans PV b 2

Choose the loop that provides the process variable to be retransmitted. For example, in the sample display at left, the heat output from loop 1 (01) will retransmit the process variable from loop 2.

Values:

none (0), or loop 1 to 4 (1 to 4) for a four-loop controller or loop 1 to 8 (1 to 8) for an eight-loop controller. Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Retransmit (68 hex)

Heat/Cool Retransmit Low Process Variable l01 Ht retrans r

LowPV b 0 ËšC

Enter the value of the process variable to retransmit as a 0 percent output signal. If the process variable falls below this value, the output will stay at 0 percent.

Values:

Any value within the input sensor range; see

Table 6.7 .

Default:

The minimum value in the input sensor range

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Retransmit (68 hex)

Heat/Cool Retransmit High Process Variable l01 Ht retrans r

HighPVb 0 ËšC

Enter the value of the process variable to retransmit as a 100 percent output signal. If the process variable rises above this value, the output will stay at 100 percent.

Values:

Any value within the input sensor range; see

Table 6.7 .

Default:

The maximum value in the input sensor range

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Retransmit (68 hex).

148 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Cascade Menu

l01 Cascade r

Other menus b

Use the cascade menu to configure cascade control. Use cascade control to calculate the set point of the current loop (the secondary, or outer, loop) based upon the output of another loop (the primary, or inner, loop).

For more information about cascade control, see Setting Up

Cascade Control on page 100.

Cascade Primary Loop l01 Cascade r prim loop bnone

Choose the primary loop. The controller uses the output of the primary loop to calculate the set point of the current loop.

Values:

none (0), or loop 1 to 4 (1 to 4) for a four loop-controller or 1 to 8 (1 to 8) for an eight-loop controller. You cannot choose the current loop. Values in parentheses are for communications.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Cascade (6A hex)

Cascade Low Set Point l01 Cascade lowr

SP b 25 ËšC

Enter the set point to use for the current loop when the output of the primary loop is at its minimum value. The set point will never drop below this value.

• If the primary loop has only the heat output enabled, then this value is the set point when the heat output of the primary loop is 0 percent.

• If the primary loop has only the cool output enabled or has the heat and cool outputs enabled, then this value is the set point when the cool output is 100 percent.

Values:

For a thermocouple or RTD input, any value within

the input range (see Table 6.7 ). For a process input, any value

between the Input range low and Input range high parameters.

This value must be less than the Cascade hi SP parameter.

Default:

25 for a thermocouple, RTD or process input.

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Cascade (6A hex)

Cascade High Set Point l01 Cascade hi r

SP b 25 ËšC

Enter the set point to use for the current loop when the output of primary loop is at its maximum value. The set point will never exceed this value.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 149

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

• If the primary loop has only the heat output enabled, or has the heat and cool outputs enabled, this value is the set point when the output of the primary loop is 100 percent.

• If the primary loop has only the cool output enabled, then this value is the set point when the output of the primary loop is 0 percent.

Values:

For a thermocouple or RTD input, any value within

the input range (see Table 6.7 on page 131). For a process in-

put, any value between the Input range low and Input range high

parameters. This value must be greater than the Cascade low SP

parameter.

Default:

25 for a thermocouple, RTD or process input.

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Cascade (6A hex)

Ratio Menu

l01 Ratio r

Other menus b

Use the ratio menu to configure ratio control, differential control or remote analog set point. Use these control methods to calculate the set point of the current loop (the ratio loop) based upon the process variable of another loop (the master loop).

For more information about ratio control, see Setting Up Ratio

Control on page 104, Setting Up Differential Control on page

106 and Setting Up Remote Analog Set Point on page 107.

Ratio Master Loop l01 Ratio r master loopbnone

Choose the master loop. The controller uses the process variable of the master loop to calculate the set point of the current loop.

Values:

none (0), or loop 1 to 4 (1 to 4) for a four-loop controller or 1 to 8 (1 to 8) for an eight-loop controller. You cannot choose the current loop.

Default:

none (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Ratio (69 hex)

Ratio Low Set Point

150

l01 Ratio low r

SP b 25 ËšC

Enter the lowest allowable set point for the current loop. The set point will never drop below this value, regardless of the result of the ratio calculation.

Values:

For a thermocouple or RTD input, any value within

the input range (see Table 6.7 ). For a process, any value be-

tween the Input range low and Input range high parameters.

This value must be less than the Ratio high SP parameter.

Default:

25

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Ratio (69 hex)

Ratio High Set Point l01 Ratio high r

SP b 25 ËšC

Enter the highest allowable set point for the current loop. The set point will never exceed this value, regardless of the result of the ratio calculation.

Values:

For a thermocouple or RTD input, any value in the in-

put sensor range; see Table 6.7 on page 131. For a process in-

put, any value from Input range low to Input range high. This value must be greater than the Ratio low SP parameter.

Default:

25

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object:

Ratio (69 hex)

Control Ratio l01 Control r ratio b 1.0

Enter the factor by which to multiply the process variable of the master loop to calculate the set point of the ratio loop.

Values:

.1 to 999.9 (1 to 9999). Values in parentheses are for communications (values are in tenths).

Default:

1.0 (10) for a thermocouple, RTD or process input.

DeviceNet Object:

Ratio (69 hex)

Ratio Set Point Differential l01 Ratio SP r diff b 0 ËšC

Enter the value to add to the ratio calculation before using it as the set point.

Values:

-9999 to 9999. Decimal placement depends upon the

Input type

and Disp format values in the Input menu.

Default:

0

Decimal Placement for DeviceNet:

See Decimal Placement for Numeric Values on page 59.

DeviceNet Object

: Ratio (69 hex)

I/O Tests Menu

lI/O tests r

Other menus b

Use the I/O tests menu to test the following:

• Digital inputs

• Digital outputs

• Keypad

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 151

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Digital Inputs lDigital inputsr

00000000 1=on

Series D8 User’s Guide

This parameter indicates the states of the eight digital inputs.

A 1 indicates that the input is connected to controller common

(on). A 0 indicates an open circuit (off).

To test an input, short it to controller common. When the input is shorted, its input state should be 1. For detailed instructions,

see Digital Input Test on page 27.

The controller display shows the states of digital inputs 1 to 8 from left to right.

Values:

0 if the input is off, 1 if the input is on

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

Keypad Test lKeypad test r press d to begin

To test the keypad, press <. This screen will appear:

uu Ends test key pressed=

To test a key, press it. If the key is working properly, an icon for that key appears.

When you are done testing the keypad, press >> to return to the Keypad test parameter.

DeviceNet Object:

None

Display Test lDisplay test r

Press d to begin

Displays two screens with alternate pixels lit. Press < to enter test, press > or < to switch pattern. Press x

to end the test.

DeviceNet Object:

None

152 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Test Digital Output 1 to 20 lTest D/O 1 r

boff

Use the Test D/O parameter to manually toggle a digital output on and off. Choose on to sink the current from the output to the controller common. Choose off to stop the current flow.

For instructions, see Digital Output Test on page 26. You can-

not toggle an output that is enabled for control.

Values:

off (0) or on (1)

Default:

off (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6B hex)

NOTE!

When you exit the I/O tests menu, all outputs that were forced on are turned off.

Parameters Only Available via Communications

These parameters are available only via communications.

They are not accessible through the controller keypad.

Alarm Acknowledge

Indicates whether an alarm has been acknowledged. To ac-

knowledge an alarm, clear the bit for that alarm. Table 6.17 on page 155 shows which bit corresponds to each alarm.

This parameter is available only via communications.

Values:

Unacknowledged (1) or acknowledged (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Alarm Enable

Enable or disable an alarm. Table 6.16 on page 154 shows the

bit to set or read for each alarm. This parameter is available only via communications.

Values:

Disabled (0) or enabled (1)

Default:

Disabled (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 153

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 6.16

Bit Positions for Alarm Enable and

Alarm Function

Alarm

Low Deviation Alarm

High Deviation Alarm

Alarm Low

Alarm High

Bit

Third

Fourth

Fifth

Sixth

NOTE!

All other bits, 1, 2, and 7 to 16 are always 0.

You must transmit a complete 2-byte word to set any alarm parameter for a channel. You may want to read the alarm settings before constructing the word to set an alarm parameter.

NOTE!

The least significant bit is considered the first bit and the most significant is consid-

ered the sixteenth bit. See Bit-Wise Values on page 59.

Alarm Function

Choose whether an alarm behaves as a standard alarm or as a boost output. For descriptions of the standard and boost func-

tions, see Table 6.14 on page 144. Table 6.16 on page 154

shows the bit to read for each alarm.

This parameter is available only via communications.

Values:

Standard alarm (0) or boost output (1)

Default:

Standard alarm (0)

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

Alarm Status

Indicates whether an alarm is active. Table 6.17 shows the bit

to read for each alarm. This parameter is available only via communications.

Values:

Not active (0) or active (1)

DeviceNet Object:

Alarm (67 hex)

154 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference

Table 6.17

Bit Positions for Alarm Status and

Alarm Acknowledge

Alarm

Low Deviation Alarm

High Deviation Alarm

Alarm Low

Alarm High

Thermocouple Reversed

Thermocouple Shorted

Thermocouple Open

RTD Open

RTD Fail

Bit

Third

Fourth

Fifth

Sixth

Seventh

Eighth

Ninth

Tenth

Eleventh

Ambient Sensor Reading

Parameter

This read-only parameter indicates the temperature measured by the cold-junction compensation sensor located near the analog input terminal block.

This parameter is available only for communications programs.

Values:

Temperature in tenths of a degree Fahrenheit. To convert to Celsius, use the formula °C = 5/9 (°F - 32).

DeviceNet Object:

Global (6 hex)

Table 6.18

System Status Bits

Description Values

DeviceNet

Object

Battery Status

Hardware

Ambient Status

Hardware Offset

Status

Hardware Gain

Status

Indicates whether the values in RAM have been corrupted while the power has been off.

Indicates whether the full scale self-calibration measurement falls within acceptable limits.

0: No corruption detected

1: Data corrupted

Indicates whether the ambient temperature is within the controller’s operating range. If the ambient is out of range, the controller sets all loops to manual mode at 0 percent power.

Indicates whether the zero self-calibration measurement falls within acceptable limits.

0: Within range

1: Outside of range

0: In calibration

1: Out of calibration

0: In calibration

1: Out of calibration

Global (6)

Global (6)

Global (6)

Global (6)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 155

Chapter 6: Menu and Parameter Reference Series D8 User’s Guide

Heat/Cool Output Action for Watchdog Inactivity Fault

Action on heat and cool outputs when a DeviceNet Watchdog

Inactivity Timeout is detected.

Values:

See Table 6.19 on page 156

Default:

0

DeviceNet Object:

Output (65 hex)

Table 6.19

DeviceNet Value for Watchdog

Inactivity Fault

0

1

DeviceNet Value Description

If not in Manual Mode will then put in Manual Mode, with output set to value in Sensor Fail Heat and Cool Output.

Do Nothing (continue operating output).

156 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

7

Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

This chapter explains how to troubleshoot and reconfigure the controller.

When There is a Problem

The controller is only one part of your control system. Often, what appears to be a problem with the controller is really a problem with other equipment, so check these things first:

The controller is installed correctly. (See the Installation

chapter.)

• Sensors, such as thermocouples and RTDs, are installed correctly and working.

NOTE!

If you suspect your controller has been damaged, do not attempt to repair it yourself, or you may void the warranty.

If the troubleshooting procedures in this chapter do not solve your system’s problems, call Watlow technical support (see

page 1). If you need to return the unit to Watlow Anafaze for

testing and repair, Customer Service will issue you an RMA

number (see Returning a Unit on page 158).

157 Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Returning a Unit

CAUTION!

Before trying to troubleshoot a problem by replacing your controller with another one, first check the installation. If you have shorted sensor inputs to high voltage lines or a transformer is shorted out, and you replace the controller, you will risk damage to the new controller.

If you are certain the installation is correct, you can try replacing the controller. If the second unit works correctly, then the problem is specific to the controller you replaced.

Before returning a controller, contact your supplier or call

Watlow (see page 1) for technical support.

Controllers purchased as part of a piece of equipment must be serviced or returned through the equipment manufacturer.

Equipment manufacturers and authorized distributors should call customer service at Watlow to obtain a return materials authorization (RMA) number. Shipments without an RMA will not be accepted. Other users should contact their suppliers for instructions on returning products for repair.

Troubleshooting the Controller

A problem may be indicated by one or more of several types of symptoms:

• A process alarm

• A failed sensor alarm

• A system alarm

• Unexpected or undesired behavior

The following sections list symptoms in each of these categories and suggest possible causes and corrective actions.

158 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

Process Alarms

When a process alarm occurs, the controller switches to the single-loop display for the loop with the alarm and displays

the alarm code (see Alarm Displays on page 81).

Possible Causes of a Process Alarm

In a heating application, a low alarm or low deviation alarm may indicate one of the following:

• The heater has not had time to raise the temperature.

• The load has increased and the temperature has fallen.

• The control mode is set to manual instead of automatic.

• The heaters are not working because of a hardware failure.

• The sensor is not placed correctly and is not measuring the load’s temperature.

• The alarm settings are too tight. The process variable varies by more than the alarm limits because of load changes, lag or other system conditions.

• The system is so poorly tuned that the temperature is cycling about set point by more than the alarm set point.

NOTE!

In cooling applications, similar issues cause high alarms.

In a heating application, a high alarm or high deviation alarm may indicate one of the following:

• The process set point and high alarm set point have been lowered and the system has not had time to cool to within the new alarm setting.

• The controller is in manual mode and the heat output is greater than 0 percent.

• The load has decreased such that the temperature has risen.

• The heater is full-on because of a hardware failure.

• The system is so poorly tuned that the temperature is cycling about set point by more than the alarm set point.

NOTE!

In cooling applications, similar issues cause low alarms.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 159

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Responding to a Process Alarm

Your response to an alarm depends upon the alarm function

setting, as explained in Table 7.1.

Table 7.1

Operator Response to Process

Alarms

Alarm

Function

Operator Response

Boost

Standard

The operator does not need to acknowledge the alarm. The alarm clears automatically when the process variable returns within limits.

Acknowledge the alarm by pressing x on the keypad or via communications. The alarm clears after the operator acknowledges it and the process variable returns within the limits.

Ambient Warning

The Ambient Warning indicates that the controller is within

5°C of its operating temperature limits. If an Ambient Warning occurs, the alarm code AW (flashing) is displayed, and the global alarm output is turned on. Acknowledging the alarm turns off the global alarm output. The error clears when the condition no longer exists and the alarm has been acknowledged.

If the controller displays the AW alarm code:

1. Acknowledge the alarm.

2. Adjust the ambient temperature to a more appropriate level.

Failed Sensor Alarms

When a failed sensor alarm occurs, the controller switches to the single loop display for the loop with the alarm and displays

an alarm code (see Alarm Displays on page 81).

A failed sensor alarm clears once it has been acknowledged and the sensor is repaired. For more information about the

causes of failed sensor alarms, see Failed Sensor Alarms on page 93.

System Alarms

If the controller detects a hardware problem, it displays an alarm message, and with the exception of the Low Power

160 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring alarm, turns on the global alarm output. The global alarm remains on until the alarm is acknowledged. The message persists until the condition is corrected and the alarm is acknowledged.

The D8 displays the following system alarm messages:

Low power

: See Low Power on page 163.

Battery dead

: See Battery Dead on page 163.

H/W error: Ambient

: See H/W Error: Ambient on page

165.

H/W error: Gain

: H/W Error: Gain or Offset on page

164.

H/W error: Offset

: See H/W Error: Gain or Offset on page 164.

Other Behaviors

Table 7.2 indicates potential problems with the system or con-

troller and recommends corrective actions.

Table 7.2

Other Symptoms

Symptom

Indicated temperature not as expected

Possible Causes

Controller not communicating

Sensor wiring incorrect

Noise

Power connection incorrect

D8 display is not lit

D8 display is lit, but keys do not work

Failed flash memory chip

D8 damaged or failed

Keypad locked

Unacknowledged alarm

D8 damaged or failed

Recommended Action

See Checking Analog Inputs on page 166.

Check wiring and service. See Wiring the

Power Supply on page 23.

Replace the flash memory chip. See

Replacing the Flash Memory Chip on page

170.

Return the D8 for repair. See Returning a

Unit on page 158.

See Keys Do Not Work on page 166.

An alarm condition exists and has not been

acknowledged. See How to Acknowledge an Alarm on page 82.

Return the D8 for repair. See Returning a

Unit on page 158.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 161

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Symptom

All loops are in manual mode at 0 percent power

Intermittent power

Controller does not behave as expected

Possible Causes

Failed sensor

Control mode of one or more loops changes from automatic to manual

BCD job selection feature loaded a different job

Hardware failure

Corrupt or incorrect values in

RAM

Recommended Action

Check the display or HMI software for a failed sensor message.

Check whether the new job was supposed to be loaded. If not, check the BCD job load setup:

Check the settings of the BCD job load parameters in the Global setup menu.

Use the Digital inputs parameter in the I/O tests

menu to test the BCD job load input(s).

Check the device that is used to activate job selection.

Check wiring and service. See Wiring the

Power Supply on page 23.

Use a separate dc supply for the controller.

Provide backup power (uninterruptible power system).

In the Global menu, set the Power up loop mode

parameter to from memory if safe for

your application. See Power Up Loop

Mode on page 128.

Check the controller display for a hardware

alarm. See System Alarms on page 160.

Clear the RAM. See Clearing the RAM on page 169.

Reading the DeviceNet Indicator Lights

The Module Status Indicator Light indicates whether or not the device has power and is operating properly. The following chart is the definition of valid states available to this indicator:

Table 7.3

Module Status Indicator States and

Descriptions

Device State

Power Off

Device Self-Test

Device Operational

Unrecoverable Fault

Indicator Light State

Off

Flashing Green-Red

Green

Red

Description

No power applied to device.

Device is in Self-Test.

Device is operating normally.

Device has detected an unrecoverable fault. All module level faults are considered unrecoverable.

162 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

Indicator Light

Off

Green

Red

Flashing Green

Flashing Red

Table 7.4

Network Status Indicator Light

Description

The device is not online.

The device has not completed the duplicate MAC ID test yet.

The device may not be powered. Look at Table 2.10, Module Status

Indicator Light.

The device is online and has connections in the established state.

For a Group 2 Only device it means that the device is allocated to a

Master.

Failed communication device.

The device has detected an error that has rendered it incapable of communicating on the network (Duplicate MAC ID, or Bus-off).

The device is online, but no connection has been allocated or an explicit connection has timed out.

A poll connection has timed out.

Corrective and Diagnostic Procedures

The following sections detail procedures you may use to diagnose and correct problems with the controller.

Low Power

If the controller displays Low power or the display is not lit:

1. Turn the power to the controller off, then on again.

2. If the Low power alarm message returns, check that the power supplied to the controller is at least 12.0 Vdc at

1 A. See Wiring the Power Supply on page 23.

3. If power is correct and the alarm message persists, make a record of all controller settings. Then, clear the RAM.

See Clearing the RAM on page 169.

4. If the alarm is not cleared, contact your supplier for fur-

ther troubleshooting guidance. See Returning a Unit on page 158.

Battery Dead

The Battery dead alarm indicates that the battery is not functioning correctly. This alarm occurs upon powerup only. The alarm indicates that values stored in memory may have been corrupted because of battery failure and should be restored to factory defaults.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 163

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

If the Battery Dead alarm occurs, the controller displays an alarm message and the global alarm output turns on. Acknowledging the alarm restores all settings to factory defaults and turns off the global alarm output.

CAUTION!

Acknowledging this alarm restores all setting to factory defaults.

NOTE!

The controller retains its settings when powered. The battery is required to keep the settings in memory only while the controller is not powered.

If a replacement controller is available:

1. Replace the controller.

2. Enter the parameter settings into the new controller.

If you must use the controller with the failed battery:

1. Acknowledge the Battery Dead alarm. This restores all setting to factory defaults.

2. Using your record of controller settings, re-enter your settings.

H/W Error: Gain or Offset

Gain and Offset alarms indicate that a hardware error is preventing accurate measurements. If a Gain or Offset alarm occurs, the control outputs are turned off, an alarm message is displayed and the global alarm output turns on. Acknowledging the alarm turns off the global alarm output. The error clears when the condition no longer exists and the alarm has been acknowledged.

If the controller displays H/W error: Gain or H/W error: Off- set

:

1. Switch the power to the controller off, then on again.

2. If the alarm persists, make a record of all controller set-

tings, then clear the RAM. See Clearing the RAM on page 169.

3. If the alarm is not cleared, contact your supplier for fur-

ther troubleshooting guidelines. See Returning a Unit on page 158.

164 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

NOTE!

If the controller has failed, it is likely that it was damaged by excessive voltage or noise.

Before replacing the controller, troubleshoot for noise and ground loops.

H/W Error: Ambient

The H/W error: Ambient alarm indicates that the ambient sensor in the D8 is reporting that the temperature around the controller is outside of the acceptable range of 0 to 50° C. This alarm can also occur if there is a hardware failure.

If an H/W Error: Ambient alarm occurs, the control outputs are turned off, an alarm message is displayed with the ambient temperature and the global alarm output turns on. Acknowledging the alarm turns off the global alarm output. The error clears when the condition no longer exists and the alarm has been acknowledged.

If the controller displays H/W error: Ambient:

1. Acknowledge the alarm and check the ambient air temperature near the controller. Adjust ventilation, cooling or heating so that the temperature around the controller is

0 to 50° C. If the unit is functioning correctly, the alarm will clear automatically when the ambient temperature is within range.

2. If the ambient temperature is within range and the alarm persists, reseat the board assembly: a) Switch off power to the controller.

b) Remove the board assembly from the D8 housing.

See Replacing the Flash Memory Chip on page 170,

steps 2 to 5.

c) Reseat the board assembly and reassemble the controller. Reverse the steps refered to above to reseat.

d) Switch on power to the controller.

3. If the alarm persists, make a record of all controller set-

tings, then clear the RAM. See Clearing the RAM on page 169.

4. If the alarm is not cleared, contact your supplier for fur-

ther troubleshooting guidelines. See Returning a Unit on page 158.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 165

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Keys Do Not Work

NOTE!

If the controller has failed, it is likely that it was damaged by excessive voltage or noise.

Before replacing the controller, troubleshoot for noise and ground loops.

If the D8 seems to function but one or more keys do not work, check the following:

• If the . key does not work, but other keys work, then the keypad is probably locked. Unlock the keypad according

to the instructions in Keypad Lock on page 129.

• Check whether there is an unacknowledged alarm. The keys will not work for anything else until all alarms are acknowledged. To acknowledge an alarm, press x.

Checking Analog Inputs

1. If the process variable read via communications does not agree with the process variable on the controller display, verify that the controller is communicating. See Reading the DeviceNet LEDs on page 148.

2. If the process variable indicated on the controller display is incorrect: a) Verify that you have selected the correct input type for the affected loops.

b) Verify that sensors are properly connected.

3. If the sensors are correctly connected, with power on to the heaters check for high common mode voltage: a) Set a voltmeter to measure volts ac.

b) Connect the negative lead to a good earth ground.

c) One by one, check each input for ac voltage by connecting the positive lead on the voltmeter to the positive and negative sensor input connections. The process variable should indicate ambient temperature. If it does not, contact your supplier to return

the unit for repair. See Returning a Unit on page

158.

NOTE!

Noise in excess of 1 Vac should be eliminat-

ed by correctly grounding the D8. See Wiring the Power Supply on page 23.

4. Verify the sensors:

166 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Earth Grounding

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

• For thermocouples, remove the thermocouple leads and use a digital voltmeter to measure the resistance between the positive and negative thermocouple leads. A value of 2 to 20 Ω is normal. Readings in excess of 200 Ω indicate a problem with the sensor.

• For RTDs, measure between the IN+ and IN- terminals of TB1. RTD inputs should read between 20 and 250 Ω .

5. To verify that the controller hardware is working correctly, check any input (except an RTD) as follows: a) Disconnect the sensor wiring.

b) In the Input menu, set the Input type parameter to

J thermocouple

.

c) Place a short across the input. On the loop that you are testing, the controller should indicate the ambient temperature.

If you suspect a problem with the ac ground or a ground loop:

• Measure for ac voltage between ac neutral and panel chassis ground. If ac voltage is above 2 Vac, then there may be a problem with the ac power wiring. This should be corrected per local electrical codes.

• With ac power on, measure for ac voltage that may be present between control panels’ chassis grounds. Any ac voltage above 2 Vac may indicate problems with the ac ground circuit.

• With the heater power on, check for ac voltage on thermocouples. A control output providing power to the heaters will increase the ac voltage if there is heater leakage and an improper grounding circuit. Measure from either positive or negative thermocouple lead to ac ground.

AC voltage above 2 Vac may indicate the ground lead is not connected to the D8 TB2 ground terminal.

If the above tests indicate proper ac grounding but the controller is indicating incorrect temperatures or process readings:

• Verify which type of sensor is installed and that the Input type

parameter in the Input menu is set accordingly.

• For an RTD or process input, check that the correct input

scaling resistors are installed (see Installing Scaling Resistors on page 172) and check the input scaling parame-

ter settings (see Setting Up a Process Input on page 88).

• If readings are erratic, look for sources of electrical

noise. See Noise Suppression on page 21.

Watlow Anafaze 167

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Eliminate possible ground loops. See Ground Loops on page 22.

• Contact your supplier for further troubleshooting guidance.

Testing Control Output Devices

Connect the solid-state relay (SSR) control terminals to the

D8 control output and connect a light bulb (or other load that can easily be verified) to be switched by the SSR's outputs.

Put the loop in manual mode and set the output to 100 percent.

The ac load should turn on.

Do not attempt to measure ac voltage at the output terminals of the SSR. Without a load connected, the SSR output terminals do not turn off. This makes it difficult to determine whether the SSR is actually working. Measure the voltage across a load or use a load that can be visually verified, such as a light bulb.

Testing the TB18 and TB50

1. Turn on power to the controller.

2. Measure the +5 Vdc supply at the TB18 or TB50. The voltage should be +4.75 to +5.25 Vdc: a) Connect the voltmeter’s common lead to TB18 terminal 2 or TB50 terminal 3.

b) Connect the voltmeter’s positive lead to the TB18 or

TB50 terminal 1.

Testing Control and Digital Outputs

1. Switch off power to the controller.

2. Disconnect any output wiring on the output to be tested.

3. Connect a 500 Ω to 100 k Ω resistor between the

+5V terminal (TB18 or TB50 terminal 1) and the output terminal you want to test.

4. Connect the voltmeter’s common lead to the output terminal, and connect the voltmeter’s positive lead to the

+5V terminal.

5. Restore power to the controller.

6. If you are testing a control output, turn the output on and off by setting the loop to 100 percent and 0 percent out-

put power (see Changing the Control Mode and Output

Power on page 85). When the output is off (0 percent),

the output voltage should be less than 1V. When the out-

168 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring put is on (100 percent), the output voltage should be between +4.75 and +5.25V.

7. If you are testing a digital output not used for control, use

the I/O tests menu to turn the output on and off. See Test

Digital Output 1 to 20 on page 153.

Testing Digital Inputs

1. Switch off power to the controller.

2. Disconnect any system wiring from the input to be tested.

3. Restore power to the controller.

4. Go to the Digital inputs parameter in the I/O tests menu.

5. Attach a wire to the terminal of the digital input to test.

When the wire is connected only to the digital input terminal, the Digital inputs parameter should show that the input is off ( 0). When you connect the other end of the wire to controller common (TB50 terminal 3), the Digital inputs

parameter should show that the input is on (1).

Clearing the RAM

Clearing the random access memory (RAM) returns all controller settings to their defaults. All stored jobs are also cleared from controller memory.

To clear the RAM:

1. Make a record of all controller settings.

2. Switch off power to the controller.

3. Press and hold <.

4. Switch on power to the controller while still holding <.

5. When you see the prompt Clear RAM?, release < and press ..

6. Restore the controller settings.

NOTE!

If your controller does not have a keypad and display, you can clear the RAM by powering the controller up with pins 1 and 6 on the keypad header (J3 on the bottom circuit card) shorted. After clearing the RAM, power down the controller and remove the jumper wire from the keypad header before putting the controller back in service.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 169

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Replacing the Flash Memory Chip

This procedure requires a 32-pin PLCC IC extraction tool.

CAUTION!

The flash memory chip and other components are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). To prevent ESD damage, use an ESD wrist strap or other antistatic device.

NOTE!

Replacing the flash memory chip results in full erasure of RAM. Make a record of all parameters before changing the flash memory chip.

1. Make a record of controller parameters.

2. Switch off power to the controller.

3. Disconnect input power to the controller.

4. Remove the four screws from the sides of the controller front bezel.

5. Remove the electronics assembly from the case, as

shown in Figure 7.1.

D8

170

D8

Figure 7.1

Removal of Electronics Assembly from Case

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

6. Unscrew the four screws at the corners of the top board and carefully unplug this board to access the bottom

board. Figure 7.2 shows the screws to remove:

D8

Figure 7.2

Screw Locations on PC Board

7. Locate the flash memory chip on the circuit board. The flash memory chip is a 32-pin socketed chip that is labeled with the model, version and checksum.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Figure 7.3

Location of Flash Memory Chip

8. Remove the existing flash memory chip from its socket with an IC extraction tool.

9. Carefully insert the new flash memory chip into the socket. Make sure that the chip is oriented so that its notch fits in the corresponding corner of the socket.

10. Reverse steps 2 through 6 to reassemble the unit.

11. Power up the controller.

12. Re-enter parameters.

Watlow Anafaze 171

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Installing Scaling Resistors

Resistors are installed for all inputs on the D8. Inputs with signal ranges between -10 and +60 mV use 0 Ω resistors in the

RC position only. All other input signals require special input scaling resistors.

Input Circuit

CAUTION!

Scaling resistors are soldered to the circuit board. Only qualified technicians should attempt to install or remove these components.

Improper techniques, tools or materials can result in damage to the controller that is not covered by the warranty.

The D8 can accept thermocouple, mVdc, Vdc, mAdc and

RTD inputs. Unless ordered with special inputs these controller accept only signals within the standard range -10 to 60 mVdc.

To accommodate other signals, the input circuit must be modified. When configured for thermocouple inputs, 0 Ω resistors are installed in all RC locations. To accommodate voltage signals outside the standard range, milliamp current signals or

RTDs, resistors are added or replaced to scale the signals to the standard range. These resistor can be installed by Watlow

Anafaze or by a qualified electronics technician using scaling resistors supplied by Watlow Anafaze.

Figure 7.4 shows the input circuit for one differential analog input. See Current Inputs on page 173 through RTD Inputs on

page 175 for specific instructions and resistor values for volt-

age, current and RTD inputs.

NOTE!

When adding your own scaling resistors to the controller, for voltage and RTD inputs you will have to carefully remove one of the

RC resistors in order to install the resistor listed in the table.

172 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Current Inputs

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

RC (Voltage)

IN+

Input

Terminal

IN-

Com

Internal

+5 Vdc

Reference

RC (RTD)

RP

RP

Figure 7.4

Input Circuit

RD

+

To D8

Circuitry

-

For each current input, you must install a resistor. The value of the resistor must be correct for the expected input range. Install the resistor in the listed resistor pack (RP) location. Note the resistor pack locations have three through-holes. Install the resistor as shown in the illustration below.

Table 7.5

Resistor Values for Current Inputs

Input Range

0 to 10 mA

0 to 20 mA

Resistor tolerance:

±

0.1%

RP#

Resistor Value RD

6.0 Ω

3.0 Ω

RD

Table 7.6

Resistor Locations for Current Inputs

3

4

1

2

Loop

Resistor

Location RD

RP1

RP2

RP3

RP4

Loop

7

8

5

6

Resistor

Location RD

RP5

RP6

RP7

RP8

Watlow Anafaze 173

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

Voltage Inputs

Series D8 User’s Guide

For each voltage input, you must install two resistors. The resistances must be correct for the expected input range. Note the resistor pack (RP) locations have three through-holes. Install the RD resistor as indicated in the illustration below.

Table 7.7

Resistor Values for Voltage Inputs

Resistor Values

Input Range

RC

0 to 100 mVdc

0 to 500 mVdc

0 to 1 Vdc

0 to 5 Vdc

0 to 10 Vdc

499 Ω

5.49 k Ω

6.91 k Ω

39.2 k Ω

49.9 k Ω

0 to 12 Vdc

Resistor tolerance:

±

0.1%

84.5 k Ω

RP#

RD

750 Ω

750 Ω

442 .

0 Ω

475.0 Ω

301.0 Ω

422.0 Ω

RD

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Table 7.8

Resistor Locations for Voltage Inputs

Resistor Locations

Loop

RC

R50

R48

R46

R44

R58

R56

R54

R52

RD

RP5

RP6

RP7

RP8

RP1

RP2

RP3

RP4

174 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

RTD Inputs

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

For each RTD input, you must install three resistors: RA, RB, and RC. The resistance must be correct for the expected input range. RA and RB are a matched pair of resistors. Install them in the resistor pack (RP) locations as shown in the illustration below.

Resistor values:

• RA/RB: 25 k Ω

• RC: 18.2 Ω

Resistor tolerances:

• RA/RB: Matched to 0.02% ( tolerance of 0.1% (

±

5 ppm/°C) with absolute

±

25 ppm/°C)

• RC: Accurate to 0.05% (

±

5ppm/°C)

RP#

RA RB

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Table 7.9

Resistor Locations for RTD Inputs

Loop

Resistor Values

RA/RB

RP4

RP5

RP6

RP7

RP1

RP2

RP3

RP3

RC

R49

R47

R45

R43

R57

R55

R53

R51

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 175

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

Scaling and Calibration

The controller provides offset calibration for thermocouple,

RTD, and other fixed ranges, and offset and span (gain) calibration for process inputs. In order to scale the input signal, you must:

1. Install appropriate scaling resistors.

2. Enter the input range at the Disp format parameter in the

Input

menu. The smallest possible range is -.9999 to

3.0000; the largest possible range is -9999 to 30000.

3. Enter the appropriate scaling values for your process. See

Setting Up a Process Input on page 88.

Configuring Serial DAC Outputs

On the Serial DAC, the voltage and current output is jumper-

selectable. Refer to Figure 7.5. Configure the jumpers as indi-

cated on the Serial DAC label.

SERIAL

NA

FAZE

PIN

: 1

+5V IN

DAT

A IN

FLASHING

VOL

OUTPUT

CURRENT

SELECT

TAGE

{

{

5 6

DAC

Jumper

Figure 7.5

Serial DAC Voltage and Current

Jumper Positions

176 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring

Configuring Dual DAC Outputs

Dual DAC modules ship with both of the outputs configured for the signal type and span that were ordered. The module contains two independent circuits (DAC 1 and DAC 2). These circuits can be configured for different output types. Remove the board from the housing and set the jumpers. The odd-numbered jumpers determine the signal from DAC 1; the evennumbered jumpers determine the output from DAC 2.

DAC 1

I SINK OUT

ANAF

DUAL

DAC

AZE

DAC 2

+5V IN DZC IN

+10-24V IN V OUT

I SINK OUT

Figure 7.6

Dual DAC

Table 7.10

Dual DAC Jumper Settings

Jumper Settings

Output

Type

1/2 3/4 5/6 7/8 9/10 11/12 13/14

0 to 5 Vdc B

0 to 10 Vdc B

A

A

A

A

O

O

B

B

A

O

4 to 20 mA O A B A A O A

A = Load jumper in the “A” position, or load jumper if header has only two pins.

B = Load jumper in the “B” position.

O = Open. Do not load jumper.

O

O

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 177

Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and Reconfiguring Series D8 User’s Guide

1. Power down the system (if the Dual DAC is already installed and wired).

2. Ensure the DAC 1 and DAC 2 terminal blocks or associated wires are labeled such that you will know which terminal block connects to which side of the board if the module is already installed and wired.

3. Unplug the two terminal blocks.

4. Depending on the installation, you may need to unmount the Dual DAC module before proceeding. Remove the four screws from the end plate on the opposite side of the module from the terminal blocks.

5. If necessary, remove the two mounting screws holding the loosened end plate in place.

6. Slide the board out of the housing.

7. Set the jumpers for the two outputs as desired. See

Table 7.10.

8. Replace the board such that the connectors extend through the opposite end plate. The board fits in the third slot from the bottom.

9. Reconnect the two terminal blocks to the DAC 1 and

DAC 2 connectors.

10. Replace the end plate, end plate screws and, if necessary, mounting screws.

11. Check the wire connections to the DAC 1 and DAC 2 terminal blocks.

12. If necessary, change the wiring connections to the correct

configuration for the new output type. See Wiring the

Dual DAC on page 38.

13. Restore system power.

178 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

8

Specifications

This chapter contains specifications for the D8 series controllers, TB50 terminal board, Dual DAC module, Serial DAC module and the D8 power supply.

System Specifications

This section contains D8 series controller specifications for environmental specifications and physical dimensions, inputs, outputs, the serial interface and system power requirements.

The controller consists of a processor module with a 50-terminal block (TB50) or a processor module with an 18-terminal block (TB18).

CE Directive

UL and C-UL

ODVA

Table 8.1

Agency Approvals / Compliance

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 89/336/EEC

UL 916, Standard for Energy Management Equipment File E177240

DeviceNet and Semiconductor SIG

Physical Specifications

Table 8.2

Environmental Specifications

Storage Temperature

Operating Temperature

Humidity

Environment

-20 to 60° C

0 to 50° C

10 to 95% non-condensing

The controller is for indoor use only

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 179

Chapter 8: Specifications

96 mm (3.78 in)

Series D8 User’s Guide

45 mm

(1.76 in)

90 mm

(3.55 in)

50 mm

(1.96 in)

213 mm

(8.4 in)

188 mm

(7.4 in)

Figure 8.1

D8 Module Dimensions

Table 8.3

D8 with Straight SCSI

Length*

Width

Height

10.0 to 10.5 in.

3.78 inches

1.96 inches

254 to 267 mm

96 mm

50 mm

*Exact requirement depends on usage and choice of cables.

180 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 8: Specifications

188 mm (7.4 in)

41 mm to 54 mm

(1.6 in to 2.1 in) for cables and clearance

25 mm

(1.0 in)

Figure 8.2

Module Dimensions and Clearance

Power Terminals (TB2)

Power Wire Gauge (TB2)

Power Terminal Torque (TB2)

Sensor Terminals (TB1)

Sensor Wire Gauge (TB1)

Sensor Terminal Torque (TB1)

Output Terminals (TB18)

Output Wire Gauge (TB18)

Output Terminal Torque (TB18)

SCSI Connector

DeviceNet Connector

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Table 8.4

D8 Connections

Captive screw cage clamp

22 to 18 AWG (0.5 to 0.75 mm 2 )

4.4 to 5.3 in.-lb. (0.5 to 0.6 Nm)

Captive screw cage clamp

Thermocouple: 20 AWG (0.5 mm 2 )

Process: 22 to 20 AWG (0.5 mm 2 )

Communications: 24 AWG (0.2 mm 2 )

4.4 to 5.3 in.-lb. (0.5 to 0.6 Nm)

Captive screw cage clamp

Multiconductor cables: 24 AWG (0.2 mm 2 )

Single-wire: 22 to 18 AWG (0.5 to 0.75 mm 2 )

4.4 to 5.3 in.-lb. (0.5 to 0.6 Nm)

SCSI-2 female

Male, sealed, micro-style, quick disconnect DeviceNet connector

Table 8.5

TB50 Physical Dimensions

Weight

Length

Width

Height

0.32 lb.

4.1 inches

4.0 inches

1.5 inches

0.15 kg

104 mm

102 mm

37 mm

Watlow Anafaze 181

Chapter 8: Specifications

182

Series D8 User’s Guide

4.1 in.

(104 mm)

4.0 in.

(102 mm)

Figure 8.3

TB50 Dimensions

1.5 in.

(37 mm)

Table 8.6

TB50 Connections

Screw Terminal Torque 4.4 to 5.3 in.-lb. (0.5 to 0.6 Nm)

SCSI Connector on

Board

Output Terminals

SCSI-2 female

Captive screw cage clamp

Output Wire Gauge

Multiconductor cables: 24 AWG

(0.2 mm 2 )

Single-wire: 22 to 18 AWG

(0.5 to 0.75 mm 2 )

Output Terminal Torque 4.4 to 5.3 in.-lb. (0.5 to 0.6 Nm)

Table 8.7

TB50 with Straight SCSI

Length

Width

Height

6.4 inches

4.0 inches

1.5 inches

163 mm

102 mm

37 mm

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 8: Specifications

6.4 in.

(163 mm)

4.0 in.

(102 mm)

1.5 in.

(37 mm)

Figure 8.4

TB50 Dimensions with Straight

SCSI Cable

Table 8.8

TB50 with Right Angle SCSI

Length

Width

Height

5.4 inches

4.0 inches

1.5 inches

137 mm

102 mm

37 mm

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 183

Chapter 8: Specifications Series D8 User’s Guide

5.4 in.

(137 mm)

4.0 in.

(102 mm) 1.5 in.

(37 mm)

Figure 8.5

TB50 Dimensions with Right-Angle

SCSI Cable

184 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 8: Specifications

Inputs

The controller accepts analog sensor inputs which are measured and may be used as feedback for control loops. It also accepts digital (TTL) inputs which may be used to trigger certain firmware features.

Table 8.9

Analog Inputs

Number of Control Loops

Number of Analog Inputs

Input Switching

Input Sampling Rate

Milliampere Inputs

Voltage Input Ranges Available

Source Impedance

D84_- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ : 4 loops

D88_- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _ : 8 loops

D84_- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _: 4 loops with full range of input types

D88_- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _: 8 loops with full range of input types

Differential, solid-state multiplexer

D84_- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _: 6 Hz (167 ms) at 60 Hz; 5 Hz (200 ms) at 50 Hz

D88_- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _: 3 Hz (333 ms) at 60 Hz; 2.5 Hz (400 ms) at 50 Hz

0 to 20 mA (3 Ω resistance) or 0 to 10 mA (6 Ω resistance), with scaling resistors

0 to 12 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 500 mV, 0 to 100 mV with scaling resistors

For 60 mV thermocouple, measurements are within specification with up to 500 Ω source resistance

For other types of analog signals, the maximum source impedance is 5000 Ω

-10 to +60 mV, or 0 to 25 V with scaling resistors

0.006%, greater than 14 bits (internal)

Input Range

Resolution

Accuracy

0.03% of full scale (60 mV) at 25° C

0.08% of full scale (60 mV) at 0 to 50° C

Analog Over Voltage

Protection

± 20 V referenced to digital ground.

Maximum Common Mode Voltage 5 V input to input or input to analog common

Common Mode

Rejection (CMR)

Calibration

Analog Ground to Frame Ground

Maximum

DC Common to Frame Ground

Maximum Potential

Open Thermocouple Detection

For inputs that do not exceed ± 5 V, >60 dB dc to 1 kHz, and

120 dB at selected line frequency.

Automatic zero and full scale

40 V

40 V

Pulse type for upscale break detection

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 185

Chapter 8: Specifications Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 8.10

Thermocouple Range and

Resolution

Thermocouple

Type

R

B

E

T

S

J

K

Accuracy* at

25ËšC Ambient

Accuracy* at

0 to 50ËšC Ambient

Range in ËšF Range in ËšC

ËšF ËšC ËšF ËšC

-350 to 1400 -212 to 760

-450 to 2500 -268 to 1371

-450 to 750

0 to 3200

-268 to 399

-18 to 1760

0 to 3210

150 to 3200

-328 to 1448

-18 to 1766

66 to 1760

±2.2

±2.4

±2.9

±5.0

±5.0

±7.2

±1.2

±1.3

±1.6

±2.8

±2.8

±4.0

±3.3

±3.8

±5.8

±8.8

±8.8

±22.1

±1.8

±2.1

±3.2

±4.9

±4.9

±12.3

-200 to 787 ±1.8

±1.0

±2.9

±1.6

* True for 10 percent to 100 percent of span except type B, which is specified for 800° F to 3200° F.

Range in ËšF

Range in ËšC

Resolution in ËšC

Measurement

Temperature in ËšC

-328.0 to

1150.0

-200.0 to

621.1

0.07

Table 8.11

RTD Range and Resolution

25

400

Accuracy at

25ËšC Ambient

ËšF

0.9

2.7

ËšC

0.5

1.5

Accuracy at

0 to 50ËšC Ambient

ËšF

1.2

4.1

ËšC

0.5

2.2

Table 8.12

Input Resistance for Voltage Inputs

Range

0 to 12 V

0 to 10 V

0 to 5 V

0 to 1 V

0 to 500 mV

0 to 100 mV

Input Resistance

85 k Ω

50 k Ω

40 k Ω

7.4 k Ω

6.2 k Ω

1.2 k Ω

186 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 8: Specifications

Number

Function

Input Voltage Protection

Voltage Levels

Response Time

Table 8.13

Digital Inputs

Maximum Switch Resistance to Pull Input Low

Minimum Switch Off Resistance

With TB50: 8

With TB18: 3

Selectable for output override or remote job selection

Diodes to supply and common. Source must limit current to 10 mA for override conditions

<1.3 V = Low

>3.7 V = High (TTL)

5 V maximum, 0 V minimum

1.7 k Ω

1.4 k Ω

50 ms (AC line frequency set to 60 Hz)

60 ms (AC line frequency set to 50 Hz)

Outputs

The controller directly accommodates switched dc and opencollector outputs only. These outputs can be used to control a wide variety of loads. They are typically used to control solid state relays or other power switching devices which, in turn, control devices such as heaters. They may also be used to signal another device of an alarm condition in the controller.

Analog outputs may be accomplished by using Dual DAC or

Serial DAC modules in conjunction with one of the control outputs.

An open-collector CPU watchdog output is also provided so that an external device can monitor the CPU state.

Analog Outputs

No direct analog outputs are provided.

The digital outputs may be used in conjunction with Dual

DAC or Serial DAC modules to provide analog signals. See

Dual DAC Specifications on page 191 and Serial DAC Spec-

ifications on page 193.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 187

Chapter 8: Specifications Series D8 User’s Guide

Digital Outputs

Number

Operation

Function

Number of Control Outputs per

PID Loop

Control Output Types

Time Proportioning Cycle Time

Control Action

Off State Leakage Current

Maximum Current

Maximum Voltage Switched

Table 8.14

Digital Outputs Control / Alarm

20 with TB50 option or 13 with TB18 option

Open collector output; ON state sinks to logic common

1 Global alarm output

1 CPU watchdog output

Balance selectable as closed-loop control or alarms

2 (maximum)

Time proportioning, distributed zero crossing, Serial DAC or on/off. All independently selectable for each output. Heat and cool control outputs can be individually disabled for use as alarm outputs

1 to 255 seconds, programmable for each output

Reverse (heat) or direct (cool), independently selectable for each output

<0.01 mA to dc common

60 mA for each output. 5V power supply (from the processor module) can supply up to 350 mA total to all outputs

24 Vdc

Voltage

Maximum Current

Minimum Time Between

Polled I/O Requests

Voltage

Maximum Current

Table 8.15

5 Vdc Output (Power to Operate

Solid-State Relays)

5 Vdc

350 mA

Table 8.16

Communications

20 ms

Table 8.17

D8 Power Requirements

15 to 24 +/-3 Vdc

1 A

188 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Power Supply

Chapter 8: Specifications

Specifications for the D8 power supply are available at www.watlow.com. See the links on the D8 page.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 189

Chapter 8: Specifications Series D8 User’s Guide

190 Watlow Anafaze

7.5 inches

(191 mm)

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

1.4 in

(36 mm)

0.19 (3/16) inch diameter

0.3 inch

(8 mm)

(5 mm)

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 8: Specifications

Dual DAC Specifications

The Watlow Anafaze Dual DAC (digital-to-analog converter) is an optional module for the D8 series controller. The Dual

DAC converts a distributed zero crossing (DZC) output signal to an analog process control signal. Watlow Anafaze provides the following version of the Dual DAC:

• 4 to 20 mAdc

• 0 to 5 Vdc

• 0 to 10 Vdc

Table 8.23

Dual DAC Environmental Specifications

Storage Temperature

Operating Temperature

Humidity

-20 to 60° C

0 to 50° C

10 to 95% non-condensing

Table 8.24

Dual DAC Physical Specifications

Weight

Length

Width

Height

0.42 lb.

4.4 inches

3.6 inches

1.8 inches

0.19 kg

112 mm

91 mm

44 mm

0.162 in. diameter

(4 mm)

DAC 1

1.8 in.

44 mm

3.6 in.

91 mm

ANAF

DUAL

DAC

AZE

DAC 2

I SINK OUT

+5V IN DZC IN

+10-24V IN V OUT

I SINK OUT

3.0 in.

76 mm

3.7 in.

94 mm

0.3 in. 0.4 in.

8 mm 10 mm

Figure 8.7

Dual DAC Dimensions

4.4 in.

112 mm

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 191

Chapter 8: Specifications Series D8 User’s Guide

Dual DAC Inputs

The Dual DAC accepts an open-collector signal from the D8 controller and the power from an external power supply. See

Table 8.25 .

Table 8.25

Dual DAC Power Requirements

Voltage

Current

Parameter Description

12 to 24 Vdc

100 mA @ 15 Vdc

Dual DAC Analog Outputs

Version

Gain Accuracy

Output Offset

Table 8.26

Dual DAC Specifications by Output

Range

4 to 20 mA

± 6

± 0.75

0 to 5 V

± 6

± 0.75

0 to 10 V

± 6

± 0.75

Ripple

Time Constant

Maximum Current Output

Load Resistance (12 V)

Load Resistance (24 V)

1.6

1.6

1.6

2

20

2

10

2

10

250 maximum 500 minimum 1000 minimum

850 maximum n/a n/a

Units percent percent of full scale range percent of full scale range seconds mAdc

Ohms

Ohms

192 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 8: Specifications

Serial DAC Specifications

Watlow Anafaze offers a Serial DAC for precision open-loop analog outputs. The Serial DAC is jumper-selectable for a 0 to

10 Vdc or 4 to 20 mA output. Multiple Serial DAC modules can be used with one D8. The Serial DAC carries a CE mark.

Table 8.27

Serial DAC Environmental Specifications

Storage Temperature

Operating Temperature

Humidity

-20 to 60° C

0 to 50° C

10 to 95% non-condensing

Table 8.28

Serial DAC Physical Specifications

Weight

Length

Width

Height

0.76 lb.

5.4 inches

3.6 inches

1.8 inches

0.34 kg

137 mm

91 mm

44 mm

ANAF

AZE

0.2 in. diameter

4 mm

1.8 in.

44 mm

SERIAL D

PIN

: 1

2 +5V IN

CLK IN

IN

FLASHING

OUTPUT SELECT

CURRENT

VO

LTAG

E

{

{

5 6

AC

3.0 in.

76 mm

4.7 in.

119 mm

5.5 in.

138 mm

3.6 in.

91 mm

0.3 in.

8 mm

0.4 in.

10 mm

Figure 8.8

Serial DAC Dimensions

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 193

Chapter 8: Specifications

Serial DAC Inputs

Series D8 User’s Guide

Table 8.29

Serial DAC Agency Approvals /

Compliance

CE Directive

UL and C-UL

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) directive 89/336/EEC

UL 916 Standard for Energy Management Equipment File E177240

The Serial DAC requires a proprietary serial data signal and the clock signal from the D8 via the TB50. Any control output can be configured to provide the data signal. The Serial DAC also requires a 5 Vdc power input.

Table 8.30

Serial DAC Inputs

Data

Clock

4 mA maximum to DC COM

Open collector or HC CMOS logic levels

0.5 mA maximum to DC COM

Open collector or HC CMOS logic levels

Table 8.31

Serial DAC Power Requirements

Voltage 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc @ 300 mA maximum

194 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Chapter 8: Specifications

Serial DAC Analog Outputs

Absolute Maximum Common

Mode Voltage

Resolution

Accuracy (Calibrated for Voltage

Output)

Temperature coefficient

Isolation Breakdown Voltage

Current

Voltage

Output Response Time

Update Rate

Table 8.32

Serial DAC Analog Output Specifications

Measured between output terminals and controller common:

1000 V

15 bits (plus polarity bit for voltage outputs)

(0.305 mV for 10 V output range)

(0.00061 mA for 20 mA output range)

For voltage output: ± 0.005 V (0.05% at full scale)

For current output: ± 0.1 mA (0.5% at full scale)

440 ppm/ °C typical

1000 V between input power and signals

0 to 20 mA with 10 V minimum compliance (500 Ω load)

0 to 10 Vdc with 10 mA source capability

1 ms typical

Once per controller A/D cycle nominal. Twice per second maximum for 60 Hz clock rate.

Output changes are step changes due to the fast time constant. All Serial DAC loop outputs are updated at the same time.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 195

Chapter 8: Specifications Series D8 User’s Guide

Declaration of Conformity

D8 Series

WATLOW ANAFAZE

314 Westridge Drive

Watsonville, California 95076 USA

Declares that the following product:

Designation: D8 Series

Model Number(s):

Classification:

English

D8(4 or 8)(any digit or letter)-(any 4 digits or letters) -

(any 4 digits or letters)

Installation Category II, Pollution Degree II

Rated Voltage: 12 to 24 VDC

Rated Current: 610mA maximum

Meets the essential requirements of the following European Union Directive(s) using the relevant section(s) of the normalized standards and related documents shown:

89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive

EN 61326: 1997 Electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use - EMC requirements (Class A)

1995 Electrostatic discharge EN 61000-4-2:

EN 61000-4-3:

EN 61000-4-4:

EN 61000-4-5:

EN 61000-4-6:

1997 Radiated immunity

1995 Electrical fast transients

1995

1994

Surge immunity

Conducted immunity

EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations immunity

Déclare que le produit suivant :

Désignation : Série D8

Français

Numéro(s) de modèle(s): D8(4 ou 8)(Tout caractère ou lettre)-(tout groupe de

4 caractères ou lettres)-(tout groupe de 4 caractères ou lettres)

Classification :

Tension nominale :

Installation catégorie II, degré de pollution II

12 à 24V c.c.

Courant nominal : 610 mA maximum

Conforme aux exigences de la (ou des) directive(s) suivante(s) de l’Union

Européenne figurant aux sections correspondantes des normes et documents associés ci-dessous :

89/336/EEC Directive de compatibilité électromagnétique

EN 61326: 1995 Appareillage électrique pour la mesure, la commande et l’usage de laboratoire –—

Prescriptions relatives à la Compatilité Electro

Magnétique (Classe A)

EN 61000-4-2 : 1995 Décharge électrostatique

EN 61000-4-3: 1997 Insensibilité à l’énergie rayonnée

EN 61000-4-4 : 1995 Courants électriques transitoires rapides

EN 61000-4-5 : 1995 Insensibilité aux surtensions

EN 61000-4-6: 1996 Insensibilité à l’énergie par conduction

EN 61000-4-11 : 1994 Insensibilité aux chutes subites, aux courtes interruptions et aux variations de tension

Erklärt, daß das folgende Produkt:

Beschreibung: Serie D8

Deutsch

Modellnummer(n):

Klassifikation:

Nennspannung:

D8(4 oder 8)(jede Zahl oder Buchstabe)(4 beliebige

Buchstaben oder Ziffern )(4 beliebige Buchstaben oder Ziffern)

Installationskategorie II, Emissionsgrad II

12 bis 24 Vdc

Nominaler

Stromverbrauch: max. 610 mA

Erfüllt die wichtigsten Normen der folgenden Anweisung(en) der Europäischen Union unter Verwendung des wichtigsten Abschnitts bzw. der wichtigsten Abschnitte der normalisierten Spezifikationen und der untenstehenden einschlägigen Dokumente:

89/336/EEC Elektromagnetische Übereinstimmungsanweisung

EN 61326: 1997 Elektrog erät e zur Messun g, Regelu ng u nd zum

Lab oreinsatz EMC - Rich tlinien ( Klasse A)

1995 Elektrostatische Entladung EN 61000-4-2:

EN 61000-4-3:

EN 61000-4-4:

EN 61000-4-5:

EN 61000-4-6:

1997 Strahlungsimmunität

1995 Elektrische schnelle Stöße

1995

1994

Spannungsstoßimmunität

Störimmunität

EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Immunität gegen Spannungsgefälle, kurze

Unterbrechungen und Spannungsabweichungen

Declara que el producto siguiente:

Designación: Serie D8

Español

Números de modelo:

Clasificación:

D8(4 ó 8)(qualquier citra ó letra)-(cualquier 4 citras ó letras)-

(cualquier 4 citras ó letras)

Categoría de instalación II, grado de contaminación ambiental II

Tensión nominal: 12 a 24Vcc

Consumo nominal

de energía: 610 mA máximo

Cumple con los requisitos esenciales de las siguientes Directivas de la Unión

Europea, usando las secciones pertinentes de las reglas normalizadas y los documentos relacionados que se muestran:

89/336/EEC - Directiva de Compatibilidad Electromagnética

EN 61326:

EN 61000-4-2:

EN 61000-4-3:

EN 61000-4-4:

1997 Equipo elétrico para medición control y uso en laboratorios - Requisitos de compatibilidad electromagnética (Clase A)

1995 Descarga electrostática

1997

1995

Inmunidad radiada

Perturbaciones transitorias eléc tricas rápidas

EN 61000-4-5:

EN 61000-4-6:

1995

1994

Sobretensión

Inmunidad conducida

EN 61000-4-11: 1994 Caídas de tensión, interrupciones breves y variaciones de tensión

Dean Hoffman

Name of Authorized Representative

Controls Product Group Leader

Title of Authorized Representative

Watsonville, California. USA

Place of Issue

September 12, 2002

Date of Issue

________________________________

Signature of Authorized Representative

25950-00 REV A

196 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Glossary

Glossary

A

AC

See Alternating Current.

AC Line Frequency

The frequency of the ac line power measured in Hertz

(Hz), usually 50 or 60 Hz.

Accuracy

Closeness between the value indicated by a measuring instrument and a physical constant or kno wn standards.

Action

The response of an output when the process v ariable is changed. See also Direct Action, Reverse Action.

Address

A numerical identifier for a controller when used i computer communications.

Alarm

A signal that indicates that the process has e xceeded or fallen below a certain range around the set point.

For example, an alarm may indicate that a process is too hot or too cold. See also Failed Sensor Alarm,

Global Alarm, High De viation Alarm, High Alarm,

Loop Alarm, Low Deviation Alarm, Low Alarm.

Alarm Delay

The lag time before an alarm is activated.

Alternating Current (AC)

An electric current that re verses at re gular intervals, and alternates positive and negative values.

Ambient Temperature

The temperature of the air or other medium that sur rounds the components of a thermal system.

American Wire Gauge (AWG)

A standard of the dimensional characteristics of wire used to conduct electrical current or signals. AWG is identical to the Brown and Sharpe (B&S) wire gauge.

Ammeter

An instrument that measures the magnitude of an electric current.

Ampere (Amp, A)

A unit that defines the rate of f w of electricity (current) in the circuit. Units are one coulomb (6.25 x

1018 electrons) per second.

Analog Output

A continuously v ariable signal that is used to represent a v alue, such as the process v alue or set point value. Typical hardw are configurations are 0 t

20mA, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 5 Vdc.

Automatic Mode

A feature in which the controller sets PID control outputs in response to the process v ariable and the set point.

Automatic Reset

The integral function of a PI or PID temperature controller that adjusts the process temperature to the set point after the system stabilizes. The inverse of integral.

Autotune

A feature that automatically sets temperature control

PID values to match a particular thermal system.

AWG

See American Wire Gauge.

B

Baud Rate

The rate of information transfer in serial communications, measured in bits per second.

BCD

Binary coded decimal. F or BCD job loading, the binary states of three digital inputs are decoded as decimal numbers 1 to 8.

Bumpless Transfer

A smooth transition from automatic (closed loop) to manual (open loop) operation. The control output does not change during the transfer.

C

Calibration

The comparison of a measuring de vice (an unknown) against an equal or better standard.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 197

Glossary Series D8 User’s Guide

Celsius

A temperature scale in which w ater freezes at 0° C and boils at 100° C at standard atmospheric pressure.

The formula for conversion to the F ahrenheit scale is

°F = (1.8 x °C) + 32. Formerly known as Centigrade.

Central Processing Unit (CPU)

The unit of a computing system that includes the cir cuits controlling the interpretation of instructions and their execution.

Circuit

Any closed path for electrical current. A configuratio of electrically or electromagnetically-connected components or devices.

Class

The model for a software object. Objects of a class are similar to one another. DeviceNet classes define wha attributes and services objects of that type have. Class services are used to e xamine and change class attributes.

Closed Loop

A control system that uses a sensor to measure a process variable and makes decisions based on that feedback.

Cold Junction

Connection point between thermocouple metals and the electronic instrument.

Common Mode Rejection Ratio

The ability of an instrument to reject electrical noise, with relation to ground, from a common voltage. Usually expressed in decibels (dB).

Communications

The use of digital computer messages to link components. See also Serial Communications, Baud Rate.

Control Action

The response of the PID control output relati ve to the difference between the process v ariable and the set point. See also Direct Action, Reverse Action.

Current

The rate of fl w of electricity. The unit of measure is the Ampere (A). 1 Ampere = 1 coulomb per second.

Cycle Time

The time required for a controller to complete one onoff-on cycle. It is usually expressed in seconds.

Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)

An error checking method in communications that provides a high level of data security.

D

DAC

See Digital-to-Analog Converter.

Data Logging

A method of recording a process v ariable o ver a period of time. Used to review process performance.

DC

See Direct Current.

Default Parameters

The programmed instructions that are permanently stored in the microprocessor software.

Derivative Control (D)

The last term in the PID algorithm. Action that anticipates the rate of change of the process and compensates to minimize o vershoot and undershoot.

Derivative control is an instantaneous change of the control output in the same direction as the propor tional error. This is caused by a change in the process variable that decreases over the time of the derivative.

The derivative is expressed in seconds.

Deutsche Industrial Norms (DIN)

A set of technical, scientific and dimensional stan dards de veloped in German y. Man y DIN standards have worldwide recognition.

Deviation Alarm

See High Deviation Alarm, Low Deviation Alarm.

DeviceNet

DeviceNet is a netw ork that connects industrial devices. De viceNet is designed to pro vide a costeffective and rob ust solution to de vice netw orking.

DeviceNet is designed to transport control-oriented information associated with lo w-level de vices and other information related to the system being controlled, such as configuration parameters

Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC)

A device that con verts a numerical input signal to a signal that is proportional to the input in some way.

DIN

See Deutsche Industrial Norms.

198 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Glossary

Direct Action

An output control action in which an increase in the process variable causes an increase in the output. Usually used with cooling applications.

Direct Current (DC)

An electric current that fl ws in one direction.

Distributed Zero Crossing (DZC)

A form of digital output control in which the output on/off state is calculated for e very ac line c ycle.

Power is switched at the zero cross, which reduces electrical noise. See also Zero Cross.

DZC

See Distributed Zero Crossing.

Emissivity

The ratio of radiation emitted from a surf ace compared to radiation emitted from a blackbody at the same temperature.

Engineering Units

Selectable units of measure, such as de grees Celsius or F ahrenheit, pounds per square inch, ne wtons per meter, gallons per minute, liters per minute, cubic feet per minute or cubic meters per minute.

E

Earth Ground

A metal rod, usually copper , that provides an electrical path to the earth, to pre vent or reduce the risk of electrical shock.

EIA/TIA

Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA). See also Serial

Communications.

EIA/TIA-232

A standard for interface between data terminal equipment and data communications equipment for serial binary data interchange. This is usually for communications over a short distance

(50 feet [15 m] or less) and to a single device.

EIA/TIA-485

A standard for electrical characteristics of generators and recei vers for use in balanced digital multipoint systems. This is usually used to communicate with multiple de vices over a common cable or where distances o ver 50 feet (15 m) are required.

Electrical Noise

See Noise.

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

Electrical and magnetic noise imposed on a system.

There are many possible causes, such as switching ac power inside the sine w ave. EMI can interfere with the operation of controllers and other devices.

Electrical-Mechanical Relays

See Relay, Electromechanical.

F

Fahrenheit

The temperature scale that sets the freezing point of water at 32° F and its boiling point at 212° F at standard atmospheric pressure. The formula for con version to Celsius is °C = 5/9 (°F - 32).

Failed Sensor Alarm

Warns that an input sensor no longer produces a v alid signal.

Filter

Filters are used to handle v arious electrical noise problems.

Digital Filter

A filter that sl ws the response of a system when inputs change unrealistically or too fast. Equi valent to a standard resistor -capacitor

(RC) filte

Digital Adaptive Filter

A filter that reject high frequency input signal noise (noise spikes).

Heat/Cool Filter

A filter that sl ws the change in the response of the heat or cool output. The output responds to a step change by going to approximately 2/3 its final alue within the numbers of scans that are set.

Frequency

The number of cycles over a specified period of time usually measured in c ycles per second. Also referred to as Hertz (Hz).

G

Gain

The amount of amplification used in an electrical ci cuit. Gain can also refer to the proportional (P) mode of PID.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 199

Glossary Series D8 User’s Guide

Global Alarm

Warns that one or more alarm conditions exist by activating a digital output.

Ground

An electrical line with the same electrical potential as the surrounding earth. Electrical systems are usually grounded to protect people and equipment from shocks due to malfunctions. Also referred to as

“safety ground.”

Input Scaling

The con verting of input signals to the engineering units of the process variable.

Input Type

The signal type that is connected to an input, such as thermocouple, RTD or process.

H

Hertz (Hz)

Frequency, measured in cycles per second.

Instance

An object that is an occurance of a class. Each instance of a DeviceNet object can have unique values for its attrib utes and can be e xamined or changed using the instance services. Class services are used to examine and change class attrib utes, which af fect all instances. Instance services are used to e xamine and change instance attributes which affect only that par ticular instance.

High Deviation Alarm

Warns that the process has risen more than a certain amount abo ve set point. It can be used as either an alarm or control function.

Integral Control (I)

Control action that automatically eliminates of fset, or droop, between set point and actual process temperature.

High Power

(As defined by Watlow Anafaze) Any voltage above

24 Vac or Vdc and any current level above 50 mAac or mAdc.

High Alarm

A signal that is associated with a set maximum v alue that can be used as either an alarm or boost control function.

HMI

Human-machine interface.

J

Job

A set of operating conditions for a process that can be stored and recalled in a controller’ s memory . Also called a recipe.

Junction

The point where two dissimilar metal conductors join to form a thermocouple.

Hysteresis

Control Hysteresis

The range through which a variation of the input produces no noticeable change in the output. In the hysteresis, specific con ditions can be placed on control output actions.

Operators select the hysteresis. It is usually abo ve the heating proportional band and belo w the cooling proportional band.

Process Hysteresis

In heat/cool applications, the +/- dif ference between heat and cool. Also known as process deadband.

K

Keypad Lock

A feature that pre vents operation of the k eypad by unauthorized people.

L

Lag

The delay between the output of a signal and the response of the instrument to which the signal is sent.

I

Input

Analog Input

— An input that accepts process variable information.

Digital Input

— An input that accepts on and of f signals.

200 Watlow Anafaze

Linearity

The deviation in response from an e xpected or theoretical straight line v alue for instruments and transducers. Also called linearity error.

Load

The electrical demand of a process, e xpressed in power (Watts), current (Amps) or resistance (Ohms).

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Glossary

The item or substance that is to be heated or cooled.

Low Deviation Alarm

Warns that the process has dropped more than a cer tain amount belo w set point. It can be used as either an alarm or control function.

On/Off Control

A method of control that turns the output full on until set point is reached, and then off until the process differs from the set point by more than the hysteresis.

Open Loop

A control system with no sensory feedback.

Low Alarm

A signal that is associated with a set minimum v alue that can be used as either an alarm or boost control function.

M

Manual Mode

A selectable mode that has no automatic control aspects. The operator sets output levels.

Optical Isolation

Two electronic netw orks that are connected through an LED (Light Emitting Diode) and a photoelectric receiver. There is no electrical continuity between the two networks.

Output

Control signal action in response to the dif ference between set point and process variable.

Manual Reset

A parameter that allows the user to eliminate offset or droop between set point and actual process temperature. See also Integral.

Output Type

The form of control output, such as time proportioning, distributed zero crossing, Serial D AC or analog.

Also the description of the electrical hardw are that makes up the output.

Milliampere (mA)

One thousandth of an ampere.

Overshoot

The amount by which a process v ariable exceeds the set point before it stabilizes.

N

Noise

Unwanted electrical signals that usually produce signal interference in sensors and sensor circuits. See also Electromagnetic Interference.

P

PID

Proportional, Inte gral, Deri vative. A control mode with three functions: Proportional action dampens the system response, inte gral corrects for droops, and derivative prevents overshoot and undershoot.

Noise Suppression

The use of components to reduce electrical interfer ence that is caused by making or breaking electrical contact, or by inductors.

Polarity

The electrical quality of ha ving tw o opposite poles, one positive and one negative. Polarity determines the direction in which a current tends to fl w.

O

Object

An object is a softw are programming concept in which data and functionality are associated with vir tual objects. DeviceNet objects consists of data called attributes and functions called services. Services are used to examine or change attribute values.

Process Input

A v oltage or current input that represents a straight line function.

Process Variable (PV)

The parameter that is controlled or measured. Typical examples are temperature, relative humidity, pressure, fl w, fluid l vel, events, etc.

Offset

The difference between the set point and the actual value of the process variable. Offset is the error in the process v ariable that is typical of proportional-only control.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Proportional (P)

Output effort proportional to the error from set point.

For example, if the proportional band is 20° and the process is 10° belo w the set point, the heat propor tioned effort is 50 percent. The lower the PB v alue, the higher the gain.

Watlow Anafaze 201

Glossary Series D8 User’s Guide

Proportional Band (PB)

A range in which the proportioning function of the control is acti ve. Expressed in units, de grees or per cent of span. See also PID.

Proportional Control

A control using only the P (proportional) value of PID control.

Pulse Input

Digital pulse signals from de vices, such as optical encoders.

PV

See Process Variable.

R

Ramp

A programmed increase in the temperature of a set point system.

Range

The area between tw o limits in which a quantity or value is measured. It is usually described in terms of lower and upper limits.

Recipe

See Job.

Relay

A switching device.

Electromechanical Relay

A power switching device that completes or interrupts a circuit by physically mo ving electrical contacts into contact with each other. Not recommended for PID control.

Solid State Relay (SSR)

— A switching de vice with no moving parts that completes or interrupts a circuit electrically.

Reset

See Automatic Reset, Manual Reset.

Resistance

Opposition to the fl w of electric current, measured in

Ohms.

Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD)

A sensor that uses the resistance temperature characteristic to measure temperature. There are tw o basic types of RTDs: the wire RTD, which is usually made of platinum, and the thermistor , which is made of a semiconductor material. The wire R TD is a positi ve temperature coef ficient sensor onl , while the ther mistor can have either a negative or positive temperature coefficient

Reverse Action

An output control action in which an increase in the process variable causes a decrease in the output. Heating applications usually use reverse action.

RTD

See Resistance Temperature Detector.

S

Serial Communications

A method of transmitting information between devices by sending all bits serially o ver a single communication channel.

Set Point (SP)

The desired v alue of the process v ariable. For example, the temperature at which a system is to be maintained.

Shield

A metallic foil or braided wire layer surrounding conductors that is designed to pre vent electrostatic or electromagnetic interference from external sources.

Signal

Any electrical transmittance that conveys information.

Solid State Relay (SSR)

See Relay, Solid State.

Span

The difference between the lower and upper limits of a range expressed in the same units as the range.

Stability

The ability of a de vice to maintain a constant output with the application of a constant input.

T

Thermistor

A temperature-sensing device made of semiconductor material that exhibits a large change in resistance for a small change in temperature. Thermistors usually have negative temperature coefficients, although th y are also a vailable with positi ve temperature coef fi cients.

202 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Thermocouple (T/C)

A temperature sensing de vice made by joining tw o dissimilar metals. This junction produces an electrical voltage in proportion to the dif ference in temperature between the hot junction (sensing junction) and the lead wire connection to the instrument (cold junction).

Thermocouple Extension Wire

A grade of wire used between the measuring junction and the reference junction of a thermocouple. Extension wire and thermocouple wire have similar properties, but extension wire is less costly.

Transmitter

A device that transmits temperature data from either a thermocouple or RTD by way of a two-wire loop. The loop has an e xternal po wer supply . The transmitter acts as a variable resistor with respect to its input signal. Transmitters are desirable when long lead or extension wires produce unacceptable signal degradation.

U

Undershoot

The amount by which a process v ariable falls below the set point before it stabilizes.

V

Volt (V)

The unit of measure for electrical potential, voltage or electromotive force (EMF). See also Voltage.

Voltage (V)

The dif ference in electrical potential between tw o points in a circuit. It is the push or pressure behind current fl w through a circuit. One volt (V) is the difference in potential required to mo ve one coulomb of charge between two points in a circuit, consuming one joule of energy. In other w ords, one volt (V) is equal to one ampere of current (I) fl wing through one ohm of resistance (R), or V = IR.

Z

Zero Cross

Action that provides output switching only at or near the zero-voltage crossing points of the ac sine wave.

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze

Glossary

203

Glossary Series D8 User’s Guide

204 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

Index

A

AC Line Frequency 76, 129

Address 61 see also Node Address

agency compliance

controller 179

power supply 189

Serial DAC 194

AH alarm code 82

AL alarm code 82

Alarm Acknowledge 72, 153

Alarm Delay 72, 147

Alarm Enable 72, 153

Alarm Function 72, 154

Alarm High Function 144

Alarm High Output 72, 144

Alarm High Set Point 71, 96, 143

Alarm Hysteresis 72, 147

Alarm Low Function 146

Alarm Low Output 72, 146

Alarm Low Set Point 71, 96, 146

Alarm Object 71

Alarm Status 64, 72, 154

alarms

acknowledging 82, 153

alarm high, see process alarms alarm low, see process alarms

boost output 144

codes 81, 82

deadband, see alarms:hysteresis

delaying 128, 147

deviation, see process alarms

enabling 144, 153

failed sensor, see failed sensor alarms

functions 144

global alarm output 36, 37, 97

hysteresis 96, 147

messages 82 process, see process alarms

RTD, see failed sensor alarms

SCRs 33

setting up 93–97

solid-state relays 33

status through communications 154

system, see system alarms

thermocouple, see failed sensor alarms

troubleshooting 159–161

wiring 33

Alarms menu 143–147

Allen-Bradley 53, 55

ambient temperature

Ambient Sensor Reading 76, 155

H/W failure: Ambient alarm 165

operating range 12, 179

Ambient Warning 160

analog inputs, see sensor inputs

analog output 119 see also Dual DAC or Serial DAC

Application Objects 60

Assembly Object 63

attribute 57, 61

auto message on loop display 80

automatic mode

Mode parameter 122

restoring after failed sensor repair 95

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Index

setting 85 autotuning 85, 91–93, 122

AW 160

B battery

Battery Dead alarm 83, 163

shelf life 7

Battery Status 76

Baud Rate 63, 130

BCD Job Load 76, 126

BCD Job Load Logic 76, 126

boost output 96, 144

bridge circuit 30

Bus Off Count parameter 130

C cables

communications 8

SCSI 7, 8

tie wrapping 31

calculating checksum 26

Calibration Offset 68, 132

cascade control 100–104

application example 102

parameters 149–150

setting up 102

Cascade High Set Point 75, 149

Cascade Low Set Point 75, 149

Cascade menu 149–150

Cascade Object 74

Cascade object 149–150

Cascade Primary Loop 75, 149

case, removing 170

CE, see agency compliance

Celsius 132

Changing 84

checksum 26

class 57, 61

Clear RAM? message 169 clearing RAM 169

clock input 194

closed-loop control 86–88

communications

cable 40

wire sizes and lengths 21

Connection Object 60, 66

contact information 1

control algorithms 111–114

on/off 112 proportional (P) 112, 117

proportional with integral (PI) 113, 117

proportional, integral and derivative (PID) 114, 117

Control menu 136–138

control mode

as shown on display 80

changing 85

unexpected switch from automatic to manual 162

Control Object 70

control outputs 118–120

action 120, 141

control algorithms, see control algorithms

curve 143

cycle time 118, 140

direct action 120, 141

distributed zero crossing 119, 139

Dual DAC, see Dual DAC

filte 120, 137

hysteresis 138

limit 141

Watlow Anafaze 205

Index Series D8 User’s Guide

on/off 118, 139

reverse action 120, 141

SCRs 33

Serial DAC, see Serial DAC

solid-state relays 33

status on powerup 128

time proportioning 118, 139

troubleshooting 168

type 139

wiring 33

Control Ratio 74, 151

controller

agency compliance 179

clearance 181

connecting to TB50 25

environment 179

input specification 185–187

mounting 13–15

output specification 187–188

specification 179–181

troubleshooting, see troubleshooting

Cool Action 69, 141

Cool Cycle Time 69, 140

Cool Derivative 70, 137

Cool Filter 71, 137

Cool Integral 70, 137

Cool Manual Reset 70, 137

cool message on loop display 80

Cool Output 69, 85

Cool Output Curve 69, 143

Cool Output Retransmit 73, 148

Cool Output Type 69, 139

cool output, see control outputs

Cool Outputs 64

Cool Power Limit 69, 141

Cool Power Limit Time 69, 141

Cool Proportional Band 70, 136

Cool Retransmit High Process Variable 73, 148

Cool Retransmit Low Process Variable 73, 148

Cool SDAC High Signal 69, 140

Cool SDAC Low Signal 69, 140

Cool SDAC Signal 69, 140

CPU Watchdog Timer 34

CS 131

C-UL, see agency compliance

current inputs

scaling resistors 30, 173 wiring 30 see also process inputs

curve 143

cycle time 140

D

D/O alarm polarity parameter 76, 97, 129

DAC, see Dual DAC or Serial DAC

data logging 98

data rate 63

Data rate swtich, see also

Baud Rate 14

Data Types 61

decimal placement 59, 60

default settings, restoring 169

derivative

description 114

guidelines for setting 116–117

setting a value 137

settings from other controllers 116 term versus rate settings 116

deviation alarms, see process alarms

DeviceNet 40–44, 45–76, 121–156, 179

Connector 6–7, 41, 181

206

interface 60

master 46, 49

network 45, 46

objects 60, 61, 63

scanner 45

differential control, see ratio control

Digital Inputs 27, 76, 152

digital inputs

mode override 127–128

remote job selection 126

restoring automatic control after sensor failure 138

specification 187

technical information 35

testing 27, 152

troubleshooting 169

wiring 35

Digital Output Alarm 76

Digital Output Alarm Polarity 129

Digital Outputs 76

digital outputs

specification 188

testing 26, 153

troubleshooting 168

will not turn on 21

wiring 31–32

dimensions

Dual DAC 19, 191

power supply 189, 190

power supply bracket 18

Serial DAC 19, 193

TB50 181–184

direct action, see control outputs

display 80–83 control modes 80

does not work 161

job display 83

loop information 80

navigation 77

process variable not correct 161, 166

scanning loop 80

toggling between loop and job displays 83

Display Format 68, 133

Display Test 152

distributed zero crossing 119, 139

droop 137

Dual DAC

configuring output 177–178

dimensions 19, 191

environment 191

input specification 192

jumper settings 177

mounting 19

output specification 192

specification 191–192 weight 191

wiring 38–39

Duplicate MAC ID Check 60

dust 12

DZC, see distributed zero crossing

E

earth, see ground

EDS 46, 47, 48–49

Electronic Data Sheet, see EDS

electrostatic discharge 170

EMI, see noise

environment 12

controller 179

Dual DAC 191

power supply 189

Serial DAC 193

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Index

ESD, see electrostatic discharge

Exception Status Byte 45, 53

explicit messages 53, 55–58, 66, 68

external bridge circuit 30

external safety devices 8

F

Fahrenheit 132

failed sensor alarms

behavior of 160

codes 81–82 messages 81–82

output power if sensor alarm occurs 142

restoring automatic control after sensor repair 95, 138

RTD alarm 94

setting up 93–95

thermocouple open 94, 142 thermocouple reversed 94, 133 thermocouple short 94

filte

output 120, 137

sensor input 135

firm are

checksum 131 version 131

flash memor , replacing 170–171

front panel 7

display, see display

keypad, see keypad

G

gain, see proportional band

Get Attribute Single 57

Global object 125–129, 152, 153

Global Setup menu 125–131

ground loops 22–23

isolation 31

paths 22

and thermocouples 29

troubleshooting 167 grounding, troubleshooting 167

Group 2 Only Slave 60

H

H/W failure: Ambient 83, 165

H/W failure: Gain 83, 164

H/W failure: Offset 83, 164

HD alarm code 82

Heat Action 69, 141

Heat Cycle Time 69, 140

Heat Derivative 70, 137

Heat Filter 70, 137

Heat Integral 70, 137

Heat Manual Reset 70, 137

heat message on loop display 80

Heat Output 69, 85

Heat Output Curve 69, 143

Heat Output Retransmit 73, 148

Heat Output Type 69, 139

heat output, see control outputs

Heat Outputs 64

Heat Power Limit 69, 141

Heat Power Limit Time 69, 141

Heat Proportional Band 70, 136

Heat Retransmit High Process Variable 73, 148

Heat Retransmit Low Process Variable 73, 148

Heat SDAC High Signal 69, 140

Heat SDAC Low Signal 69, 140

Heat SDAC Signal 69, 140

Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Heat/Cool Output Action for Watchdog Inactivity Fault 69

high deviation alarm, see process alarms

High Deviation Function 145

High Deviation Output 72, 145

High Deviation Value 71, 97, 145

humidity specificatio

controller 179

Dual DAC 191

power supply 189

Serial DAC 193

HW Ambient Status 76

HW Gain Status 76

HW Offset Status 76

Hysteresis 71, 138

hysteresis

alarm 96

control 138

I

I/O Tests menu 151–153

Identity Object 61

input data 45, 51, 52, 53, 64, 65

Input Filter 68

description 135

setting before autotuning 93

Input High Signal 68, 134

Input Low Signal 68, 135

Input Menu 131–135

Input Object 67

input power, see power supply

Input Range High 68, 134

Input Range Low 68, 135

input scaling 88–91

Input Type 68

Input Units 68, 132

inputs

analog, see sensor inputs

current, see current inputs

digital, see digital inputs

filte 135

RTD, see RTD

scaling 88–91 scaling parameters 88–91, 134, 135

scaling resistors 172–176

sensor inputs wiring 27–30 sensor, see sensor inputs

setup parameters 131–135

specification 185–187

thermocouple, see thermocouples

voltage, see voltage inputs

installation 11–44

alarm wiring 33

clearance 14, 181

control output wiring 33

controller 13–15

digital output wiring 31–32

Dual DAC 19

environment 12

ground loops, see ground loops

location 12

noise suppression, see noise

overview 11

panel hole dimensions 14 panel thickness 14

power supply 18, 23–25

sensor input wiring 27–30

Serial DAC 19

system components 12

TB50 16–17, 25

testing 26, 27

tie-wrapping cables 31

Watlow Anafaze 207

Index

tools 13

torque for screw terminals 24

typical 12

wire recommendations 20, 31

wire sizes

controller 21

TB50 output 182

wiring 20–25, 27–39

instance 57, 61, 67, 68, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75

instance attributes 61

integral

description 113

guidelines for setting 116–117

setting a value 137

settings from other controllers 116

term versus reset settings 115

J

job display 83

jobs

remote selection 126

saving to memory 125

jumpers

Dual DAC 177

power supply common 25

Serial DAC 176

when using 2-wire RTD 30

K keypad

does not work 82, 161, 166

navigation 79

testing 152

Keypad Lock 76, 129

Keypad Test 152

L

ladder logic 53, 54, 55, 57

LD alarm code 82

limit controller 8

limit, output 141

Load Setup From Job 76, 125

load setup not available 125

Loop Name 68, 132

loop name on loop display 80

loops

closed-loop control 86–88

display information 80

naming 132

number available 185

tuning 115–117

low deviation alarm, see process alarms

Low Deviation Function 145

Low Deviation Output 72, 146

Low Deviation Value 71, 97, 145

low power alarm 83, 163

M

MAC ID (see also

Node Address) 61, 63, 130

man message on loop display 80

manual mode

during a failed sensor alarm 142 during a mode override 142 during a thermocouple open alarm 142

if ambient temperature is out of range 155

Mode parameter 122

setting 85

208

Series D8 User’s Guide

manual reset 137

mapping data 50, 51 master 50

Master/Slave 47

menu structure 213

menus

accessing 86

Alarms 143–147

Cascade 149–150

Global Setup 125–129

I/O Tests 151–153

Input 131–135

map of 124, 213

navigating 86

Output 139–143

PV Retrans 148

Ratio 150–151

message body 57

message header 56, 57

Message Router Object 62

Mode 71, 85

Mode outputs disabled 85

Mode Override 76, 127–128

percent output power 142

Mode Override Digital Input Active 76, 127–128

Model and Firmware Version parameter 131

model number

description of 5, 6

Modes 64

Module LED parameter (see also Module status indicator) 130

Module Status Indicator 6, 23, 40, 41, 44, 130, 162

mounting, see installation

N

Network LED parameter (see also Network status indicator) 130

Network Length 42

Network Status Indicator 6, 23, 40, 41, 44, 130

Node Address 63, 130

switch 14

noise

eliminating problems with 21

isolation 22

reducing with zero-cross switching 119

suppression 21–22 symptoms 21

O on/off control

control signal 118

description 112

selecting 139

Open Thermocouple Cool Output Average 69

Open Thermocouple Heat Output Average 69, 94, 142

output data 53, 64, 65

Output Menu 139–143

Output Object 68

output power

changing 85

on loop display 80

output specification 187–188

outputs

5 Vdc output power 188

alarm, see alarms

analog, see Dual DAC or Serial DAC

boost output 96

control, see control outputs

D8 power requirements 188

digital, see digital outputs

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide Index

filte 137

process variable retransmit, see process variable retransmit

reference voltage, see reference voltage

solid-state relays 33

specification 187–188

wiring, see installation

over-temperature shutdown devices 8

P

panel, see installation

parameters

alarm 143–147

cascade control 149–150

control 136–138

editing

through keypad 86

via DeviceNet 58–59

global 125–131

I/O tests 151–153

input 131–135

map of 124, 213

navigating 86

output 139–143

process variable retransmit 148

ratio control 150–151

restoring all default settings 169

Serial DAC 140

parts list 5–6

PID

derivative constant, see derivative integral term, see integral

proportional band, see proportional band

settings for various applications 117

settings from other controllers 116

tuning 115–117

PLC 45, 49, 50, 51, 54, 57

transmitting process data to 98

polled I/O 45, 47, 50, 51–53, 54, 64, 66

power failure 9, 128

power supply

dimensions 189, 190

dimensions of mounting bracket 18

for Dual DAC 38

input voltage 190

mounting 18

output voltage 190

requirements 18

specification 189–190 weight 189

wiring 23–25

Power Up Alarm Delay 76, 128

Power Up Loop Mode 76, 128

Predefined Master/Sl ve Connection Set 60

process alarms 159–160

alarm high 96 alarm low 96 boost output 96

codes 82

function 96 high deviation 96 low deviation 96

outputs 95

parameters 143–147

setting up 95

process inputs

0 to 5 Vdc setup example 90

4 to 20 mA setup example 89

display format 133

engineering units 132

scaling and calibration 176

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze

specification 185

Process Variable 68

process variable

not displayed correctly 21, 161, 166

on loop display 80

retransmit, see process variable retransmit process variable retransmit 97–100

application example 98

parameters 148

Process Variables 64

Programmable Logic Controller, see PLC

proportional band

description 112

guidelines for setting 115–117

setting a value 136

settings for various temperature ranges 115

settings from other controllers 116

PV Retransmit menu 148

PV Retransmit Object 72

PV, see process variable

R

RAM

clearing 169

erasure of during flash memory replacemen 170

ratio control 104–109

application example

differential control 107

ratio control 105

remote analog set point 108

differential control 106–107

parameters 150–151

remote analog set point 107–109

setting up 105

Ratio High Set Point 74, 151

Ratio Low Set Point 74, 150

Ratio Master Loop 74, 150

Ratio menu 150–151

Ratio Object 73

Ratio Set Point Differential 74, 151

Ref terminals, see reference voltage reference voltage 30

registered 50

Registering 47, 48

remote analog set point, see ratio control

repair, returning controller for 158

reset, integral: see integral

Restore Automatic Mode 71, 95, 138

retransmit, see process variable retransmit

returning the controller 158

reverse action, see control outputs

Reverse Thermocouple Detection 68

Reversed Thermocouple Detect 94, 133

RF alarm code 82

RFI, see noise

RMA number 158

RO alarm code 82

RSLinx™ 46

RSNetWorx 45, 46, 47, 48, 49

RTD

accuracy 186

alarm messages 82

calibration offset 132

range 186

recommended type 30

resolution 186

scaling resistors 30, 175

troubleshooting 167

wiring 30

RTD alarm 82

209

Index

S safety

external safety devices 8

output status on power up 9

symbols and signal words in this manual 2

Save Setup As Job 76, 125

scaling resistors

for current inputs 30, 173 for RTD inputs 30, 175

for thermistor inputs 175

for voltage inputs 30, 174

installing 172–176

scan 50, 51, 60

scanner 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 57

SCSI cable 7, 8

clearance 14, 181

installing 25

Sensor Fail Cool Output 69, 142

and failed sensor alarm 93

mode override 127

reversed thermocouple detection 133

thermocouple short alarm 129

Sensor Fail Heat Output 69, 142

and failed sensor alarm 93

mode override 127

reversed thermocouple detection 133

thermocouple short alarm 129

sensor inputs

calibration offset 132 engineering units 132

failed sensor alarms 160

filte 135

specification 185

troubleshooting 166

wiring 27–30

Serial DAC

agency compliance 194 clock input 194

configuring output 176

configuring the controller outpu 139

dimensions 19, 193

environment 193

input specification 194

jumper positions 176

mounting 19

output specification 195

process variable retransmit 98

setup parameters 140

specification 193–195 weight 193

wiring 39–40

services 57, 61

Set Attribute Single 57

Set Point 68

set point

changing 84

on loop display 80

remote analog set point 107–109

using cascade control to set 100–104

using differential control to set 106–107

using ratio control to set 104–109

Set Points 64

setting up a process input 88

shutdown devices 8

solid-state relays

5 Vdc power from controller 188

distributed zero crossing 119

troubleshooting controller connections 168

specification 179–195

controller inputs 185–187

controller outputs 187–188

210

Series D8 User’s Guide

Dual DAC 191–192

power supply 189–190

Serial DAC 193–195

TB50 181–184

spread, see hysteresis

system alarms

behavior of 160

messages 82, 83

troubleshooting 163–166

T

T/C open alarm message 82

T/C reversed alarm message 82

T/C shorted alarm message 82

TB18

alarm outputs 33, 34

connections 36

CPU watchdog timer output 34

digital output wiring 32

testing after installation 26

troubleshooting 168

TB50 183

alarm outputs 33, 34

connections 25, 37

CPU watchdog timer output 34

digital inputs 35

digital output wiring 32

dimensions 181–184

mounting on DIN rail 16

mounting with standoffs 17

specification 181–184

technical description 8

terminal specification 182

testing after installation 26

troubleshooting 168

weight 181

temperature

incorrect on display 161, 166

operating 179, 189, 191, 193 storage 179, 189, 191, 193

temperature scale 132

terminal specification

TB50 182

Test D/O parameter 153

testing

TB18 after installation 26

TB50 after installation 26 see also troubleshooting

The 191

thermistor inputs, scaling resistors for 175

Thermocouple Short Alarm 76, 94, 129

thermocouples

accuracy 186

alarm messages 82

calibration offset 132

ground loops 29

manual mode if break occurs 142

polarity checking 133

range 186 resolution 186

reversed detection 133

troubleshooting 167

types supported 131

wiring 29

thermoforming example 107

tie wraps 31

time proportioning 139

cycle time 140

description 118

TO alarm code 82

torque, see terminal specification

Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Series D8 User’s Guide

TR alarm code 82

troubleshooting 157–176

alarms 159–161

all loops are set to manual 0% 162

Battery Dead alarm 163

check these things firs 157

control mode switches unexpectedly 162

control outputs 168

digital inputs 27, 152, 169

digital outputs 26, 153, 168

display does not work 161

grounding problems 167

H/W failure: Ambient alarm 165

H/W failure: Gain alarm 164

H/W failure: Offset alarm 164

keypad 152, 161, 166

low power alarm 163

process variable incorrect on display 161, 166

RTDs 167

sensor inputs 166

software 169

TB18 168

TB50 168

thermocouples 167

unexpected behavior 162

TS alarm code 82

tun message on loop display 80, 93

tuning control loops 115–117

U

UL, see agency compliance

under-temperature shutdown devices 8

V voltage inputs

ranges 186 resistance 186

scaling resistors 30, 174 wiring 30

W

Watchdog Inactivity Fault 156

weight

Dual DAC 191

power supply 189

Serial DAC 193

TB50 181

wiring, see installation

Z

Zero Calibration 155

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze

Index

211

Index Series D8 User’s Guide

212 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

Menu Structure

Global setup

(page 125)

Load setup from job

Save setup as job

BCD job load

BCD job load logic

Mode override

Mode override D/I active

Power up alarm delay

Power up loop mode

Keypad lock

TC short alarm

AC line freq

D/O alarm polarity

MAC ID

Baud rate

Module LED

Network LED

Bus off count

WATLOW D8x Vx.xx cs=xxxx

Input

(page 131)

Input type

Loop name

Input units

Input pulse sample

Calibration offset

Reversed T/C detect

Disp format

Input range high

Input high signal

Input range low

Input low signal

Input filter

Control

(page 136)

Heat prop band

Heat integral

Heat derivative

Heat manual reset

Heat filter

Cool prop band

Cool integral

Cool derivative

Cool manual reset

Cool filter

Hysteresis

RestoreAuto

Output

(page 139)

Heat output type

Heat cycle time

Heat SDAC signal

Ht SDAC low signal

Ht SDAC hi signal

Heat action

Heat power limit

HtPwr limit time

Sensor fail heat output

Open T/C ht out average

Heat output curve

Cool output type

Cool cycle time

Cool SDAC signal

Cl SDAC low signal

Cl SDAC hi signal

Cool action

Cool power limit

ClPwr limit time

Sensor fail cool output

Open T/C cl out average

Cool output curve

Alarms

(page 143)

Alarm high SP

Alarm high func

Alarm high output

HiDeviation value

HiDeviation func

HiDeviation output

LoDeviation value

LoDeviation func

LoDeviation output

Alarm low SP

Alarm low func

Alarm low output

Alarm hysteresis

Alarm delay

PV retrans

(page 148)

Heat output retrans PV

Ht retrans LowPV

Ht retrans HighPV

Cool output retrans PV

Cl retrans LowPV

Cl retrans HighPV

Cascade

(page 149)

Cascade prim loop

Cascade low SP

Cascade hi SP

Ratio

(page 150)

Ratio master loop

Ratio low SP

Ratio high SP

Control ratio

Ratio SP diff

I/O tests

(page 151)

Digital inputs

Keypad test

Display test

Test D/O 1

...

Test D/O 20

Doc. 0600-3120-2000 Watlow Anafaze 213

214 Watlow Anafaze Doc. 0600-3120-2000

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents